Upload
sohail-a-javed
View
26
Download
3
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Huawei Enterprise Training Path with details
Citation preview
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 1
Training Description for Enterprise
Network
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 2
CONTENTS
CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 2
1 Training Solution ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ............................................................... 8
1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path ......................................................................................... 9
1.3 Security Certification Training Path .................................................................................... 10
1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path............................................. 11
1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path ......................................................... 12
1.6 NE Routers Training Path ................................................................................................... 13
1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path ............................................................................................. 14
1.8 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ....................................................................... 15
1.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path ................................................................ 16
1.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ................................................................... 17
1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path ............................................... 18
1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path .................................................................................... 19
1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path ............................................................................................... 20
1.14 PTN Product Training Path ................................................................................................. 21
1.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ........................................ 22
1.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path .......................................................................... 23
1.17 Firewall Training Path ......................................................................................................... 24
1.18 Security Management Software Training Path ................................................................... 25
1.19 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path.............................................................. 26
1.20 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path ............................................ 27
2 Required Training Programs ............................................................................................................. 28
3 Training Programs Description ......................................................................................................... 34
3.1 Certification Training Programs .......................................................................................... 34
3.1.1 HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training .................................... 34
3.1.2 HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days) ......... 37
3.1.3 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training
40
3.1.4 HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training ..................... 43
3.1.5 HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training .................. 45
3.1.6 HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ................... 46
3.1.7 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training
(Fast-Track 5 days) .................................................................................................................... 48
3.1.8 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training ........................ 50
3.1.9 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ....................... 56
3.1.10 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network Training ....... 60
3.1.11 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training ................... 62
3.1.12 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training ................... 65
3.1.13 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ............................................. 68
3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs ............................................... 75
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 3
3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ........................................................... 75
3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training ..................................................................................... 77
3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training ........................................................................... 78
3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training ......................................................................... 82
3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ................................................................. 84
3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals (Fast-Track) ................................................................. 88
3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs .......................................................................... 93
3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training ............................................................ 93
3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ...................................................................... 96
3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .......................................................... 101
3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ............................................................. 106
3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training ........................................................................ 109
3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training ............................................................................110
3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training .........................................................................112
3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ...................................................................117
3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ...............................................117
3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ...........................................119
3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M Training)
121
3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ............................... 129
3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ........ 132
3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training......................................... 135
3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 137
3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M
Training) 140
3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ......................... 147
3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) .......... 152
3.5 AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs ............................................................... 157
3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 157
3.6 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs ............................................................. 161
3.6.1 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ............. 161
3.6.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ........ 163
3.6.3 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O&M Training) ................................................................................................................ 166
3.6.4 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
173
3.6.5 S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 177
3.6.6 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ............ 180
3.6.7 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ....... 182
3.6.8 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O&M Training) ................................................................................................................ 185
3.6.9 Campus Switches(S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ..... 190
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 4
3.7 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs .................................................... 196
3.7.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training
196
3.7.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training 198
3.7.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O&M Training) ......................................................................................... 201
3.7.4 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track) .............................................................................................................................. 208
3.8 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs ........................................................................... 213
3.8.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training ........................................................................... 213
3.8.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ....................................................... 215
3.8.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 217
3.8.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M Training) ... 220
3.8.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training .... 225
3.8.6 WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training ................................................. 231
3.9 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs .................................................................................... 235
3.9.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 235
3.9.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................................... 237
3.9.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ...................................................... 241
3.9.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training ................................................................. 243
3.9.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training ................................................. 245
3.10 PTN Products Training Programs .................................................................................... 247
3.10.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training........................................... 247
3.10.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .......................................................... 249
3.10.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ......................................................... 251
3.10.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training .......................................................... 256
3.10.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training ............................................................ 258
3.11 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs ............................. 260
3.11.1 eSight Enterprise NM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 260
3.11.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M
Training) 262
3.11.3 eSight WLAN Management Training......................................................................... 265
3.11.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training ................................................................. 266
3.11.5 eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training ............................................................. 267
3.11.6 eSight SLA Management Training ............................................................................ 268
3.11.7 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training ................................................................. 269
3.11.8 eSight Smart Report Management Training ............................................................. 270
3.11.9 eSight NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training .................................. 271
3.11.10 eSight Access Management Training ....................................................................... 272
3.11.11 eSight Data Center Management Training ............................................................... 273
3.11.12 eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training ................................................. 274
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 5
3.11.13 eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training ...................................................... 278
3.12 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs ................................................................ 281
3.12.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training ........................................................... 281
3.12.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training ........................................................... 282
3.12.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training .................................................................... 283
3.12.4 Data Center Network Design Training ...................................................................... 284
3.13 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs .................................................. 285
3.13.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training ............................................................. 285
3.14 Security Technology Topic Training Programs ................................................................. 287
3.14.1 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training ...................................................................... 287
3.14.2 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training ...................................................................... 289
3.14.3 Firewall Advanced Technology Training .................................................................... 291
3.15 Firewall Training Programs ............................................................................................... 293
3.15.1 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training 293
3.15.2 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ....................................... 295
3.15.3 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ........ 298
3.15.4 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ..................... 300
3.15.5 USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training .................... 303
3.15.6 USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include USG9500
High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) .................................................. 305
3.15.7 USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track)................................................................................................................. 308
3.15.8 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training ...........................................................311
3.15.9 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and
Commissioning Training) ......................................................................................................... 313
3.15.10 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training.......................................................... 316
3.15.11 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and
Commissioning Training) ......................................................................................................... 318
3.16 Security Management Software Training Programs ........................................................ 321
3.16.1 Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 321
3.16.2 Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include Policy Center(TSM)
Installation and Commissioning Training) ................................................................................ 323
3.16.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 326
3.17 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs ................................................... 329
3.17.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training ........................................................... 329
3.17.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and Commissioning
Training) 331
3.18 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs .................................. 334
3.18.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 334
3.18.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 336
Training Proposal
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 6
3.18.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................. 338
3.18.4 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 340
3.19 Security Planning and Design Training Programs ........................................................... 343
3.19.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training ..................................................................... 343
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 7
1 Training Solution
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
XXX Product Installation and
Commissioning Training
XXX Product Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
XXX Product Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
XXX Design Training
XXX Technology Fundamentals XXX Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
XXX Product Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Xd Xd
Xd
Xd
Xd
XXX Advanced Technology
Training
Xd
Xd Xd
Fast-Track
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 8
1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path
Elective Guide
Follow the parts to learn.
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
4d
Associate
Professional
Expert
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
6d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
5d
HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD
Huawei Networking Technology and Device
8d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 9
1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path
Elective Guide
HCNA(HCDA) or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.
Associate
Professional
Expert
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized Business WLAN
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 10
1.3 Security Certification Training Path
Elective Guide:
Follow the paths to learn
Associate
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System
5d
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
5d
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network
HCIE-Security(to be)
5d
HCNA-Security-CBSN
Constructing Basic
Security Network 5d
1d
Expert
Professiona
l
ssional
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 11
1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path
Elective Guide
HCNA(HCDA) is required and HCNP-RS(HCDP) is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and
Switching Field Engineer Training.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
HCNA (HCDA)
8d
HCNP-RS(HCDP)
15d
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Huawei Certified Network Associate
Huawei Certified Network Professional
- Routing and Switching
Huawei Certified Routing and
Switching Field Engineer
Routing and Switching Expert
HCIE-RS
15d
Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert
- Routing and Switching
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 12
1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path
Elective Guide
HCNP-RS(HCDP) or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training
programs.
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technologies Training
5d
Enterprise IP VPN
Technologies Training
5d
Enterprise MPLS VPN
Technologies Training
5d
Enterprise MPLS TE
Technologies Training
3d Enterprise QoS
Technologies Training
1d
Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise Network Engineer
Enterprise HA
Technologies Training
1d Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert
Enterprise IP Multicast
Technical Expert
Enterprise IP VPN
Technical Expert
Enterprise QoS
Technical Expert
Enterprise HA
Technical Expert
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
Advanced Technology Training
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Technology Fundamentals Training (Fast-Track)
5d
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
1d
1d
Huawei VRP System
Training
Enterprise LAN Technology Training
5d
Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
5d
2d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 13
1.6 NE Routers Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
NE Routers Installation and
Commissioning Training
NE Routers Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
1d
1d
2d
1d
1d
2d
10d
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
5d
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 14
1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
AR G3 Routers Installation and
Commissioning Training
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Technology Fundamentals
Training
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
1d
1d
2d
1d
1d
2d
10d
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Fast-Track
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 15
1.8 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Technology Fundamentals
Training
1d
1d
2d
1d
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
14d 5d
Fast-Track
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 16
1.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
1d
2d
10d
5d
Fast-Track
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
Planning and Design Training
1d
1d
2d
1d
Advanced Technology Training
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
Operation and Maintenance Training
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
5d
S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training
3d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 17
1.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
1d
2d
5d
Planning and Design Training Advanced Technology Training Operation and Maintenance Training
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
1d
1d
2d
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
Fast-Track
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 18
1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training
Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
1d
1d
2d
1d
1d
2d
10d
5d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 19
1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path
Elective Guide
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
WLAN Installation and
Commissioning Training
WLAN Basic Operation and
Maintenance Training
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
WLAN Technology Basics
Training
WLAN Planning and Design
Training
5d 1d
2d
5d
2d
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training
Technology Fundamentals
Training
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 20
1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path
Elective Guide
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
1d
10d
4d
Planning and Design Training Advanced Technology Training Operation and Maintenance Training
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training
Enterprise Campus Network
Design Training
Data Center Network Design
Training
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
1d
1d
2d
1d
Advanced Technology
Training
25d
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
ME60 Products
Troubleshooting Training
5d
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
2d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 21
1.14 PTN Product Training Path
Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve
PTN Products Installation and
Commissioning Training
PTN Products 1st Line
Maintenance Training
Planning and Design Training
Operation and Maintenance Training
Advanced Technology Training
2d
2d
PTN Network Planning and
Design Training
3d
PTN Products 3rd Line
Maintenance Training
5d
PTN Products 2nd Line
Maintenance Training
10d
IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals
(Fast-Track)
14d 5d
Fast-Track
Technology Fundamentals
Training
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 22
1.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path
Elective Guide
eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.
Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.
eSight Basic Operation
and Maintenance Training
1d
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)
2d
eSight WLAN
Management Training
0.5d
WLAN Administrator
eSight MPLS VPN
Management Training
0.5d
MPLS VPN Administrator
eSight SLA Management
Training
0.5d
SLA Administrator
eSight IPSec VPN
Management Training
0.5d
IPSec VPN Administrator
eSight Smart Report
Management Training
0.5d
Report Administrator
eSight NTA (Network Traffic
Analyzer) Management
Training 0.5d
Network Monitor / Traffic Analyzer
eSight Access
Management Training
0.5d
End User Administrator
eSight Data Center
Management Training
0.5d
Data Center Administrator
eSight Advanced Feature Training
eSight Operator
eSight Operation and Maintenance Engineer
eSight Product Expert
eSight Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
eSight MPLS Tunnel
Management Training
0.5d
MPLS Tunnel Administrator
eSight LogCenter (eLog)
Management Training
2d
eLog Administrator
eSight SecureCenter (VSM)
Management Training
2d
VSM Administrator
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 23
1.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path
Elective Guide
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.
Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training
1d
Enterprise Campus
Network Design Training
1d
Enterprise MPLS VPN
Design Training
1d
WLAN Planning and
Design Training
5d
Data Center Network
Design Training
2d
Enterprise Network
Design Engineer
Enterprise Network
Design Expert
Enterprise MPLS
VPN Design Expert
Data Center Network
Design Expert
Enterprise WLAN
Design Expert
Training Path
Target Audience
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 24
1.17 Firewall Training Path
Elective Guide:
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle
Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle
Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle
Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training)
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Training
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
Advanced Technology
Training
1d
5d
2d
Fast-Track
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
Training
3d
USG9500 High-end Firewall
Installation and Commissioning
Training
USG9500 High-end Firewall
Operation and Maintenance
Training (include High-end Firewall
Installation and Commissioning
Training)
1d
5d
Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track) 3d
Firewall UTM Technical Topic
Training
3d
Firewall Planning and Design
1d
SVN Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
SVN Installation and
Commissioning Training) 3d
SVN Installation and
Commissioning Training
1d
ASG Installation and
Commissioning Training
1d
ASG Operation and Maintenance
Training(include ASG Installation
and Commissioning Training) 3d
Firewall Advanced Technology
Training
2d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
USG6600 Next Generation
Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall
Operation and Maintenance Training
(include USG6600 Next Generation
Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training)
1d
5d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 25
1.18 Security Management Software Training Path
Elective Guide:
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
Advanced Technology
Training
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Policy Center(TSM) Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
Policy Center(TSM) Operation and
Maintenance Training (include
Policy Center(TSM) Installation and
Commissioning Training) 3d
DSM Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Training
2d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 26
1.19 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path
Elective Guide:
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance
Training
Advanced Technology
Training
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
NIP Installation and
Commissioning Training
1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance
Training (include NIP Installation
and Commissioning Training) 3d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 27
1.20 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path
Elective Guide:
The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.
Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve
Planning and Design
Training
Operation and
Maintenance Training
Advanced
Technology Training DDoS Solution Operation and
Maintenance Training
3d
iSOC Solution Operation and
Maintenance Training
3d
UMA Solution Operation and
Maintenance Training
2d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training
Firewall Technology
Fundamentals Training
2d
Anyoffice Solution Operation and
Maintenance Training
3d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 28
2 Required Training Programs
Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:
Training Programs Level
Duration
(working
days)
Training
Location
Class
Size
Certification Training Programs
HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate
Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
(Fast-Track 5 days) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional -
Routing and Switching Training Ⅲ 15 6 ~ 12
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing
Network Training Ⅲ 6 6 ~ 12
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise
Switching Network Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network
Performance Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional -
Routing and Switching Training (Fast-Track 5 days) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN
Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security
Network Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of
Security Network Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security
System Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security
Network Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs
IP Network Technology Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 29
Huawei VRP System Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise LAN Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise WAN Technology Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Advanced Technology Training Programs
Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Enterprise QoS Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise HA Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and
Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 30
AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance
Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and
Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and
Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance
Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and
Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and
Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation
and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic
Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and
Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12
WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
WLAN Technology Basics Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 31
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and
Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12
ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12
iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products Training Programs
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12
PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training Ⅲ 5 4 ~ 12
PTN Network Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 3 4 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs
eSight Enterprise Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
eSight WLAN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight SLA Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight IPSec VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight Smart Report Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management
Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 32
eSight Access Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight Data Center Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12
eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise Campus Network Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12
Data Center Network Design Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12
Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Security Technology Topic Training Programs
Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Firewall Training Programs
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training(include USG2000/5000
Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training)
Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and
Maintenance Training(include USG6600 Next Generation
Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation
and Commissioning Training)
Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 33
USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and
Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
SVN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN
Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
ASG Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG
Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Security Management Software Training Programs
TSM Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM
Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
DSM Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
NIP Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12
NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP
Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12
Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12
AnyOffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
Firewall Planning and Design Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12
Level Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ: Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert
Course
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 34
3 Training Programs Description
3.1 Certification Training Programs
3.1.1 HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who wish to become a network associate
Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification
Prerequisites
A working knowledge of networks and IT technologies.
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Explain the intricacies of data transmission over IP networks, for competency in supporting,
maintaining and troubleshooting IP networks.
Perform IP address planning for establishing well designed networks.
Navigate and manage Huawei products through the virtual routing platform (VRP).
Build efficient data switching environments through the management of switching products and
manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link layer protocols.
Explain the principles of routing and configure (RIP/OSPF) routing protocols for implementation
and support of effective enterprise network routing solutions.
Establish solutions for enterprise network administration and management through application
layer services including DHCP, FTP and Telnet.
Establish a fundamental network capable of supporting basic communications.
Enhance link layer performance the through implementation of features and services including
link aggregation, VLAN technologies and GVRP.
Manage and support Wide Area Network communications over serial links for a range of
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and Frame Relay.
Apply Network Address Translation (NAT) solutions for private networks.
Provide Wireless WAN network backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.
Provide effective IP security solutions using various security architectures including Access
Control Lists (ACL), AAA, and IPsec with GRE support solutions.
Describe and implement solutions for unified enterprise network management, including SNMP
and Huawei eSight NMS technology solutions.
Establish truly business capable enterprise networks for real-world industries.
HCNA-HNTD
Huawei Networking Technology and Device
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d OARS1
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 35
Training Content
ARS1 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Networking Technology and Device
Module 1-Building Basic IP Networks
Enterprise Network Constructs
Ethernet Framing
IP Addressing
Internet Control Message Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol
Transport Layer Protocols
Data Forwarding Scenario
Module 2-Huawei Device Navigation and Configuration
Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network
Navigating the CLI
File System Navigation and Management
VRP Operating System Image Management
Module 3-Supporting and Maintaining Enterprise Local Area Networks
Establishing a Single Switched Network
Spanning Tree Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Module 4-Establishing Internetwork Communication
Segmenting the IP Network
IP Static Routes
Distance Vector Routing with RIP
Link State Routing with OSPF
Module 5-Implementing Network Application Services
DHCP Protocol Principles
FTP Protocol Principles
Telnet Protocol Principles
Module 6-Local Enterprise Network Features and Services
Link Aggregation
VLAN Principles
GARP & GVRP
Wireless LAN Overview
Module 7- Connecting Beyond the Enterprise Network
Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN Technology
Frame Relay Principles
Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE
Network Address Translation
Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network Solutions
Module 8-Securing the Enterprise Network
Access Control Lists
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 36
AAA
Securing Data with IPsec VPN
Generic Route Encapsulation
Module 9-Enterprise Network Management Solutions
Simple Network Management Protocol
eSight Network Management Solutions
Module 10-Supporting IPv6 Networks
Introducing IPv6 Networks
IPv6 Routing Technologies
IPv6 Application Services – DHCPv6
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Max 16
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 37
3.1.2 HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days)
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who wish to become a network associate
Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification
Prerequisites
Those who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain
Huawei certificate
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Navigate and manage Huawei products through the virtual routing platform (VRP).
Enhance link layer performance the through implementation of features and services including
link aggregation, VLAN technologies and GVRP.
Build efficient data switching environments through the management of switching products and
manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link layer protocols.
Explain the principles of routing and configure (OSPF) routing protocols for implementation and
support of effective enterprise network routing solutions.
Manage and support Wide Area Network communications over serial links for a range of
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and Frame Relay. Provide Wireless WAN network
backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.
Describe and implement solutions for unified enterprise network management, including SNMP
and Huawei eSight NMS technology solutions.
Supporting IPv6 Networks.
Training Content
ARSA HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Networking Technology and Device
(Fast Track 5 days)
Module 1-Huawei Device Navigation and Configuration
Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network
Navigating the CLI
File System Navigation and Management
VRP Operating System Image Management
Module 2-Supporting and Maintaining Enterprise Local Area Networks
VLAN Principles
GARP & GVRP
Spanning Tree Protocol
HCNA-Fast
Huawei Networking Technology and Device (Fast-Track 5 days)
Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d OARSA
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 38
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Module 3-Establishing Internetwork Communication
Link State Routing with OSPF
Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN Technology
Frame Relay Principles
Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE
Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network Solutions
Module 4-Enterprise Network Management Solutions
Simple Network Management Protocol
eSight Network Management Solutions
Module 5-Supporting IPv6 Networks
Introducing IPv6 Networks
IPv6 Routing Technologies
IPv6 Application Services – DHCPv6
Duration
5 working days
Timetable
Time Content
Training
Method
1 AM
1.Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network
2.Navigating The CLI
3.File System Navigation and Management
4.VRP Operating System Image Management
Lecture
PM 5.Basic Operations on the VRP Platform Practice
2
AM
6.VLAN Principle
7.GARP&GVRP
8.Spanning Tree Protocol
Lecture
PM
9.Configuring Layer 3 Switching
10.GVRP Configuration
11.STP Configuration
Practice
3
AM
12.Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
13.Link State Routing with OSPF
14.Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN
Technology
Lecture
PM
15.RSTP configuration
16.OSPF Single-area Configuration
17.HDLC and PPP Configuration
Practice
4 AM 18.Frame Relay Principles
19.Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 39
20.Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network
Solutions
21.Simple Network Management Protocol
22.E-Sight Network Management Solutions
PM
23.FR Configuration
24.PPPoE Server and Client
25.SNMP and eSight Configuration
Practice
5
AM
26.Introducing IPv6 Networks
27.IPv6 Routing Technologies
28.IPv6 Application Services -DHCPv6
Lecture
PM 29.IPv6 Routing Configuration
30.DHCPv6 Configuration Practice
Note:
This timetable is just for reference only, instructor should adjust itself according to the students'
situation.
Class Size
Max 16
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 40
3.1.3 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Prerequisites
HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP, RSTP and MSTP
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and QinQ
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Describe the basic principle of network security
List the features of USG
Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
List High Availability technology
Training Content
OPRS1 HCNP-R&S-IERN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
Module 1-Advenced IP
Advanced IP Address Planning
Module 2-OSPF
HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
OPRS3 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
OPRS2 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
OPRS1 6d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 41
OSPF Routing Protocol Basics
OSPF Neighbor and Adjacency
OSPF Protocol Packet and LSA
OSPF Neighbors and Adjacencies
Calculating OSPF Intra-area Routes
OSPF Inter-area Routing
OSPF External Routing
OSPF Special Areas
OSPF Troubleshooting
OSPF Extension
Module 3-BGP
BGP Overview
Working Principle of BGP
BGP Route Selection
BGP Route Aggregation
BGP Routing Policies
BGP Route Reflection and Confederation
BGP Multi-homing
BGP Troubleshooting
Module 4- Route Selection and Control
Route Selection Tools
Routing Policies
Policy based Route Selection
Module 5- Multicast
IP Multicast Basics
IGMP Protocol Principles
PIM-DM Protocol Principles
PIM-SM Protocol Principles
OPRS2 HCNP-R&S-IESN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
Module 1-VLAN
VLAN Technology Principles and Configuration VLAN
QinQ Principles
Module 2-STP
STP Principles and Configuration
RSTP Principles and Configuration
MSTP Principles and Configuration
Module 3-Access technology
802.1x Principles and Configuration
DHCP Principles and Application
Module 4-MPLS
MPLS Principles
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 42
LDP Principles
OPRS3 HCNP-R&S-IENP Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
Module 1-Firewall
Basic Security Functions & Configurations
NAT Functions & Configuration
Attack Defense & Configurations
USG Firewall Dual System and Configuration
Module 2- High Availability
HA Technology
VRRP Principle and Configuration
Module 3-QoS
IP QoS Overview
Differentiated Services Model Overview
IP QoS Technologies
Class-based QoS
IP QoS Implementation on High-end Routers of Huawei
Duration
15 working days
Class Size
Max 16
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 43
3.1.4 HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Prerequisites
HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM
Training Content
OPRS1 HCNP-R&S-IERN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
Module 1-Advenced IP
Advanced IP Address Planning
Module 2-OSPF
OSPF Routing Protocol Basics
OSPF Neighbor and Adjacency
OSPF Protocol Packet and LSA
OSPF Neighbors and Adjacencies
Calculating OSPF Intra-area Routes
OSPF Inter-area Routing
OSPF External Routing
OSPF Special Areas
OSPF Troubleshooting
OSPF Extension
Module 3-BGP
BGP Overview
Working Principle of BGP
BGP Route Selection
BGP Route Aggregation
BGP Routing Policies
BGP Route Reflection and Confederation
HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
OPRS1 6d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 44
BGP Multi-homing
BGP Troubleshooting
Module 4- Route Selection and Control
Route Selection Tools
Routing Policies
Policy based Route Selection
Module 5- Multicast
IP Multicast Basics
IGMP Protocol Principles
PIM-DM Protocol Principles
PIM-SM Protocol Principles
Duration
6 working days
Class Size
Max 16
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 45
3.1.5 HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Prerequisites
HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP, RSTP and MSTP
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and QinQ
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Training Content
OPRS2 HCNP-R&S-IESN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
Module 1-VLAN
VLAN Technology Principles and Configuration VLAN
QinQ Principles
Module 2-STP
STP Principles and Configuration
RSTP Principles and Configuration
MSTP Principles and Configuration
Module 3-Access technology
802.1x Principles and Configuration
DHCP Principles and Application
Module 4-MPLS
MPLS Principles
LDP Principles
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Max 16
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
OPRS2 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 46
3.1.6 HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Prerequisites
HCNA certification or the similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic principle of network security
List the features of USG
Describe IP QoS end-to-end process
List High Availability technology
Training Content
OPRS3 HCNP-R&S-IENP Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
Module 1-Firewall
Basic Security Functions & Configurations
NAT Functions & Configuration
Attack Defense & Configurations
USG Firewall Dual System and Configuration
Module 2- High Availability
HA Technology
VRRP Principle and Configuration
Module 3-QoS
IP QoS Overview
Differentiated Services Model Overview
IP QoS Technologies
Class-based QoS
IP QoS Implementation on High-end Routers of Huawei
Duration
5 working days
HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network Performance
OPRS3 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 47
Class Size
Max 16
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 48
3.1.7 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching
Training (Fast-Track 5 days)
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate
Those who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain
Huawei certificate
Prerequisites
Obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Configure OSPF
Configure BGP
Configure Route Selection Tools
Configure IGMP, PIM-SM/DM
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN and GVRP
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP
Describe the basic principle of network security
Configure the functions and features of USG series firewall
Describe HUAWEI IP QoS end-to-end process
Configure end-to-end IP QoS
Build and configure simulation of enterprise network
Training Content
OPRSA HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional (Fast-Track 10 days)
HCNP-RS(HCDP) Fast-Track 5 days
Configure OSPF and BGP
Configure Route Selection Tools
VLAN principle and configuration
IP multicast configuration
IP QoS principle and configuration
USG series firewall basic functions and configuration
HCNP-R&S( Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Fast-Track 5 days
Lecture,Hands-on exercise 5d OPRSA
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 49
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Max 16
Timetable
Day 1
AM Configure OSPF and BGP Lecture
PM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice
Day 2 AM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice
PM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice
Day 3
AM Configure Route Selection Tools VLAN Technology Principle and Configuration Configure IGMP and PIM
Lecture
PM Route Selection and Control practice VLAN configuration practice IGMP and PIM DM/SM configuration practice
Practice
Day 4
AM USG series firewall basic function and configuration IP QoS Overview
Lecture
PM Firewall function and configuration practice IP QoS practice
Practice
Day 5 AM
IP QoS practice Integrated Lab Assessment Practice
Practice
PM Integrated Lab Assessment Practice Practice
Remark
The experiment content listed in the training content just contain the parts of the standard lab
manual, instructors can select according to the situation on their own when actual delivery
The provided schedule is for reference only, instructors can change according to the students’
situation on their own when actual delivery
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 50
3.1.8 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Those who hope to become a network associate of WLAN
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe what WLAN is
Describe the development process of WLAN technology
List typical application scenarios of WLAN technology
Describe the functions and roles of WLAN standards organizations
Describe the related basic knowledge of RF
List working principle and specific property of RF
Describe the working frequency band of WLAN and the basic concepts of channel
Describe the rules of the working frequency band and channel in each country
List other technologies related to WLAN
Describe the latest Huawei product information
List the application scenarios of Huawei product
Describe the power supply mode of Huawei product
Configure Huawei VRP basic command
Configure AC basic attributes
Upgrade the software of AC and AP
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
List Huawei WDS network mode
Describe mesh network mode
Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
List the advantages of 802.11n
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical layer
Describe spread spectrum technology of 802.11
Describe DSSS technology
Describe OFDM technology
HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW
Implementing Small to Medium-sized Business WLAN
OAWL1 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 51
Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology
Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol
Outline the general network mode of WLAN
Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN
Differentiate different applications of VLAN in WLAN service
Describe WLAN business configuration processes of Huawei AC6605
Configure the basic attributes of AC
Describe the basic features of Huawei product
List the key features of Huawei product
Describe the basic concepts of roaming
Outline the basic principles of roaming
List the application scenarios of roaming
Describe security threat of WLAN
Describe the related concepts of WIDS and WIPS
Describe the related concepts of AAA
Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption techniques
Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile
Describe the frame format of 802.11
Differentiate three frame types and functions of 802.11
Describe 802.11 media access control mechanism
Analyze media access process of WLAN
Describe the concepts of QoS
Configure WMM-profile
Configure Traffic-profile
Describe the definition and functions of antenna
Describe the main performance indicates of antenna
List some common passive device
List the basic process of the WLAN network planning
List basic interference factors of WLAN
Describe the basic load-balancing ways of WLAN
List the typical application scenarios of WLAN
Describe the network planning processes of WLAN
Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN network planning ways
Describe the functional features of Huawei WLAN planning tool
Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN network
List some functions of eSight
Configure WLAN service
Configure the basic information of AC
Configure AP online
Configure AP-profile
Configure radio-profile
Configure service-set
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 52
Configure AP region
Configure AP binding profile
Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of WLAN service
Describe WLAN commonly used fault troubleshooting
Describe WLAN common diagnostic commands and tools
Describe the cause of some common failures of WLAN
Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot some common failures
Training Content
OAWL1 HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN - Implementing Small to
Medium-sized Business WLAN
WLAN Historical Overview
Introduction to wireless networks
What is WLAN
WLAN development
WLAN applications
WLAN Standards Bodies
State Radio Regulation of China
FCC
ETSI
IEEE
Wi-Fi
IETF
WAPI
WLAN RF Principles Introduction
WLAN RF basics
WLAN RF principles
WLAN RF characteristics
WLAN Frequency Bands
Frequency and channel introduction
2.4GHz bands
5GHz bands
Other technology
Huawei WLAN Product Introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment application
Huawei WLAN equipment power supply mode introduction
VRP Introduction and Basic Configuration
Introduce the Huawei VRP
Configuring basic AC attributes
AC and AP software upgrade
The basic operation of the AC
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 53
Use hype terminal to connect equipment
Modify the Device Name
Configuring the console user interface
Configuring the VTY user interface
Checking the configuration
Reboot the device
WLAN Topologies Introduction
Basic elements of IEEE 802.11
WLAN topologies introduction
802.11 Protocol Introduction
802.11a/b/g protocol introduction
802.11n protocol introduction
802.11 Physical Layer Technology
802.11 physical layer basics
802.11 physical layer technology Introduction
CAPWAP Fundamentals
AP technology introduction
CAPWAP tunnel introduction
WLAN Networking Introduction
WLAN Network Mode
Forward mode introduction
The application of VLAN in WLAN
WLAN Network Configuration
WLAN configuration roadmap
WLAN Layer 2 Network Configuration
Configure AC and AP to be Connected
Configure global parameters on the AC
Configure the APs go online
Configure WLAN-ESS interfaces
Configure radio-profile, security-profile, traffic-profile and service-set
Configure data forward-mode
Configure VAPs and deliver configuration to the APs
Huawei WLAN Product Features Introduction
The basic characteristics of Huawei WLAN product
The key characteristics of Huawei WLAN product
WLAN Roaming
Roaming concept introduction
Roaming basic principle Introduction
Roaming application scenarios
WLAN Security Introduction
WLAN Security threat introduction
WIDS/WIPS introduction
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 54
AAA introduction
WLAN Access Security and Configuration Introduction
WLAN authentication technology
WLAN encryption technology
WLAN access security policy
WLAN Access Security Configure
Configure AC6605 access security
Configure a RADIUS server template
Configure WPA authentication
Configure WPA2 authentication
Configure different Encryption
02.11 MAC Layer Introduction
802.11 frames
Data frames
Control frames
Management frames
802.11 Media Access Control
802.11 media access control Mechanism
WLAN media access process
Huawei WLAN QoS Introduction
QoS and Service Model
WMM-profile introduction
Traffic-profile introduction
Antenna
Antenna concept introduction
Antenna basics
Antenna parameters introduction
Other device introduction
WLAN Layer 3 Network Configuration
Configure data forward-mode
Configure AC and AP to be connected
VLAN planning and allocate in Network
Make the APs gone online
Configure WLAN-ESS interfaces
Configure Radio, security-profile, traffic-profile and service-set
Configure VAPs and deliver configuration to the APs
WLAN Basic Network Planning Introduction
The basic flow of WLAN planning
WLAN signal interference introduction
Huawei load balancing technology
WLAN Planning Scheme and Typical Cases Introduction
WLAN typical application scenario
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 55
WLAN planning flow
Indoor AP typical cases
Indoor distributed AP typical cases
Outdoor AP typical cases
Huawei WLAN Planner
Huawei WLAN planner basic function
Plan Huawei WLAN
eSight Function and Wizard Configuration Introduction
eSight introduction
Configure WLAN business by wizard
Manual configure WLAN business use eSight
Configure basic parameters on the AC
Configure AP online
Configure AP profile
Configure radio profile
Configure ESS profile
Configure AP regions
eSight WLAN Maintenance
Manage and maintain WLAN
Operation demonstration
WLAN Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting methods introduction
Common diagnostic commands and Tools Introduction
WLAN common troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 56
3.1.9 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand OSI model
Understand TCP/IP principles
Understand TCP/IP security issues
Understand Common attack means
Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.
Understand firewall Main features and technologies.
Understand the Data forwarding process and basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.
Understand firewall Security Policy and configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the application of NAT.
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.
Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic technology
Understand firewall User Management
Understand firewall VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G technology
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
Understand key VPN technologies.
Understand the classification and application of VPN.
Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.
Understand the principles of L2TP.
Understand the application scenarios of client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.
Understand the configuration of L2TP.
Understand the principles and implementation of GRE VPN.
Understand the security mechanism of GRE VPN.
Understand the typical application and configuration of GRE VPN.
Understand the principles of the IPSec technology.
Understand the AH and ESP technologies.
HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training
HC11031 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 57
Understand the service process of IKE.
Understand the application scenarios and configuration of IPSec VPN.
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.
Understand the Basic functions and features of the SVN product.
Understand the configuration of SSL VPN.
Understand firewall UTM basic technology
Understand what terminal security is.
Understand the components and deployment of the Policy Center system.
Understand the organizational management and access control functions of the Policy Center
system.
Understand the security policy configuration of the Policy Center system.
Content
HC11031 HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network
Network Security Overview
OSI Model Introduction
TCP/IP Introduction
TCP/IP Security Issues
Common Network Attacks
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall function and features
Firewall device management
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Security Policy
Packet Filtering Technology
Firewall packet forward principles
Application of Firewall Security Policy
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic Technology
Dual-System Hot Backup Principles
Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration Commands
Firewall User Management
User Authentication overview
AAA Technology Principles
User Management Application
Firewall Networking
VLAN Feature Technology
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 58
SA and E1 Feature Technology
ADSL Feature Technology
WLAN Feature Technology
3G Feature Technology
VPN Overview
VPN Introduction
VPN technologies
VPN classification
L2TP VPN
VPDN Overview
L2TP VPN Technology
Client-Initialized L2TP
NAS-Initialized L2TP
GRE VPN
GRE VPN Overview
GRE VPN Technology
Analyzing the Application Scenarios of GRE VPN
IPSec VPN
IPSec VPN Overview
IPSec VPN Architecture
AH Technology
ESP Technology
IKE Technology
IPSec VPN Application Scenarios
SSL VPN
SSL VPN Overview
SSL VPN Technology
SSL VPN Security Policy
SSL VPN Application Scenario
Firewall UTM basic Technology
Background of UTM
Firewall UTM basis Technology
Firewall UTM Technology Application
Terminal Security
Overview of Terminal Security
Deployment of the Policy Center System
Deployment of Terminal Security Policies
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 59
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 60
3.1.10 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
Has network security equipment operation and maintenance experience
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand firewall device management
Master firewall management by AAA
Master password recovery
Understand the implementation and configuration of traffic limiting policies
Understand the implementation and configuration of SLB
Understand Dual-system hot backup principle and configuration.
Understand the principle and configuration of BFD
Understand the implementation and configuration of Link-group
Understand IP-link principle and configuration
Understand Bypass principle and configuration
Understand Eth-Trunk principle and configuration
Learn about the technology principles of virtual firewall.
Master virtual firewall configuration methods.
Know virtual firewall technology applications.
Understand advanced features and configuration of IPSec VPN.
Understand advanced features and configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive SSL VPN applications in HA.
Understand Basic network attack.
Understand Basic attack defense technologies on firewalls.
Understand Application and configuration of basic attack defense technologies.
Understand the damages and mechanisms of major DDoS attacks.
Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS solution.
Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS solution.
Learn about the installation and configuration of the anti-DDoS solution.
Master troubleshooting method.
HCNP-Security CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
HC12031 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 61
Master the troubleshooting of security policy.
Master the troubleshooting of NAT technology.
Master the troubleshooting of attack defence.
Master the troubleshooting of traffic limiting policies.
Master the troubleshooting of HA technology.
Master the troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
Master the troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
Master the troubleshooting of SSL VPN. Content
HC12031 HCNP-Security CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network
Advanced Firewall Device Management
Basic device management
AAA
Password Recovery
Advanced Security Feature of Firewall
Traffic Limiting Policies of Firewall
SLB
Firewall Reliability
IP-Link technology
BDF technology
Eth-Trunk technology
Link-Group technology
Bypass technology
Dual-System Hot Backup technology
Virtual Firewall Technology
Virtual Firewall Overview
Virtual Firewall Technology Principles
Virtual Firewall Application
Advanced VPN Applications of Firewalls
Review of basic concept VPN
Advanced Application of IPSec VPN
Application of L2TP over IPSec VPN
Comprehensive SSL VPN Applications
Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall
Overview of Network Attacks
Attack Defense Technologies Defense on Firewalls
Application of Attack Defense
Anti-DDoS Technologies on Firewalls
Common Anti-DDoS Technologies
Anti-DDoS Solution Design
Networking and Configuration of the Anti-DDoS Solution
Troubleshooting for Firewall Feature
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 62
Troubleshooting Method
Security Policy troubleshooting
Troubleshooting of Advanced Security Feature
Dual-System Hot Backup troubleshooting
L2TP VPN troubleshooting
IPSEC VPN troubleshooting
SSL VPN troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
3.1.11 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with OS.
Be familiar with 802.1X access control tecnology. Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the current situation of terminal security.
Understand the background of terminal security.
Understand the multidimensional defense system as a terminal security solution.
Understand the relationship among the five elements.
Understand the concepts and components of identity authentication.
Understand the implementation mechanism of security policies during authentication
Understand the implementation principles of multiple access control devices.
Know the terminal security solution design roadmap.
Know how to complete the availability design of a solution.
Know the current situation of document security.
Understand the functions of DSM
Master how to implement Policy Center system.
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System
HC12032 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 63
Master how to configurue Policy Center system.
Master the operation and maintenance of Policy Center system.
Master the operation and maintenance of DSM.
Describe the common fault in Policy Center system.
Master the troubleshooting method of Policy Center system
Master the troubleshooting method of DSM system
Master how to utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting security implementations.
Master the troubleshooting method of Hardware SACG implementations. Content
HC12032 HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System
Terminal Security Overview
Security Threats Faced by Intranets.
Challenges to Terminal Security Solutions.
Multidimensional Defense System for Terminal Security.
Terminal Security Design Principles
Overview of Terminal Security Design Principles.
Terminal Security Technology
Policy Center System Overview
Terminal Security System Design Plan
Terminal Security System Installation and Deployment
Terminal Security System Installation
Policy Center System Configuration
Terminal Security System Deployment
Terminal Security System Operation and Maintenance
Operation Management
System Maintenance
Operation Tools
Document Security Management System Overview
DSM Overview
DSM Features
DSM Application Scenario
DSM System Installation and Deployment
DSM Basic Operations
Troubleshooting of Terminal Security System
Roadmap of Policy Center Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tools Introduction
Policy Center Classic Troubleshooting Cases
DSM Classic Troubleshooting Cases
Duration
5 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 64
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 65
3.1.12 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Has network security equipment operation and maintenance experience
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the basic knowledge of information security
Understand the background of content security products
Understand the main technologies used for content security
Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention technology
Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention application scenario
Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.
Learn about virus signatures and the common tools for detecting viruses
Understand major antivirus technologies for gateways
Understand the application of antivirus technologies for gateways
Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering technology
Describe common WEB risk
Understand the key technology of Web filtering
Understand the Web filtering application scenario
Understand the basic concept of spam
Understand the generation and harm of spam
Understand the mechanism of spam filter
Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei
Describe background of deep packet inspect.
Understand the main DPI technology.
Understand the DPI application scenario.
Master the troubleshooting of IPS
Master the troubleshooting of AV
Master the troubleshooting of URL filtering
Master the troubleshooting of RBL filtering
Master the troubleshooting of deep packet inspect
Master the troubleshooting of Database updated.
HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing Service Security Network
HC12033 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 66
Content
HC12033 HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing Service Security Network
Overview of Content Security
Basics About Information Security
Background of Content Security
Overview of Content Security Technologies
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology
Foundation of intrusion detection and prevention
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technologies
Application of the Intrusion Prevention Technology — NIP
Application of the Intrusion Prevention Technology — UTM IPS
Antivirus Technologies for Gateways
Basic Knowledge of Viruses.
Virus Signatures and Common Tools for Detecting Viruses.
Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.
Application of Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.
WEB Filtering Technologies
Overview of Web Filtering
Website Filtering Technologies
Applications of Web Filtering
Spam Filtering Technologies
Basic concepts of spam
Spam filtering technology
Anti-spam (RBL filtering) technology
Mail content filtering technology
Spam filtering technology applications
DPI Technologies
DPI technologies Background
DPI Overview
DPI Applications
Troubleshooting for UTM Features
IPS Fault Troubleshooting
AV Fault Troubleshooting
URL Fault Troubleshooting
RBL Fault Troubleshooting
DPI Fault Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting of Database updated
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 67
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 68
3.1.13 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei NE Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE Routers
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei NE Routers
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE Routers
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei NE Routers
Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning
Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware architecture
Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and modules
Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding
List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics
List S12700 Agile Switches software features
Describe S12700 Agile Switches application scenarios
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers
Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
OSRS1 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 69
Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Box Switches Routers
Describe Functions of Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System
Describe the Networking Architecture of Huawei eSight
Describe the Technical Architecture of Huawei eSight
Describe Specifications of Huawei eSight
Describe Basic Issues of Environment Maintenance
Describe Methods of Cleaning the Equipment
Describe Indicators of Huawei Devices
Describe Precautions of Parts Replacement
Describe Steps of Parts Replacement
List Common Maintenance Commands
Backup and Restore Configuration Files
View Alarms and Logs of Huawei Devices
Describe the Concepts of Emergency Maintenance
Describe Common Flows for Emergency Maintenance
Describe Flow for Handling Hardware Faults
Describe Flow for Handling Service Faults
Describe Common Steps of Software Upgrade
Describe Precautions of Software Upgrade
Describe Steps of Installing Patches
Describe Basic Operations on the Bootrom
Describe Principles of ISSU
Describe Application Scenarios of ISSU
Describe Operational Processes of ISSU
List the Security Features of Huawei Routers and Switches
List the differences of Security Features Between Huawei Routers and Switches
Describe Application Scenarios of Huawei Routers and Switches
Describe Security Threats on the Network Access Layer
Describe Principles of ARP Attack Defense
Describe Principles of MFF
Describe the Differences Between Firewalls and Routers / Switches
Describe Firewall Features of Huawei AR G3 Routers
Describe Firewall Features of Huawei S7700 SPU
Describe Domain-based User Management on Huawei Devices
Configure Telnet Server on Huawei Devices
Configure FTP Server / Client on Huawei Devices
Configure TFTP Client on Huawei Devices
Configure SSH Server on Huawei Devices
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 70
Describe Principles of SNMP
Configure SNMP on Huawei Devices
Describe Steps of Installing Huawei eSight
Describe Basic Operations of Huawei eSight
Describe Principles of Stacking and CSS
Describe Application Scenarios of Stacking and CSS
Configure Stacking and CSS on Huawei Devices
Describe Principles of LLDP
Describe Application Scenarios of LLDP
Configure LLDP on Huawei Devices
Training Content
OSRS1 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training
Huawei NE Series Routers Introduction
The Positioning of Huawei NE Series Routers
The Hardware Architecture of Huawei NE Series Routers
The Boards and Modules of Huawei NE Series Routers
The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei NE Series Routers
The Characteristics of Huawei NE Series Routers
The Application Scenarios of Huawei NE Series Routers
Huawei AR G3 Series Routers Introduction
The Positioning of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
The Hardware Architecture of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
The Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
The Characteristics of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
The Application Scenarios of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers
Huawei Chassis Switches Introduction
The Positioning of Huawei Chassis Switches
The Hardware Architecture of Huawei Chassis Switches
The Boards and Modules of Huawei Chassis Switches
The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Chassis Switches
The Characteristics of Huawei Chassis Switches
The Application Scenarios of Huawei Chassis Switches
Huawei Box Switches Introduction
The Positioning of Huawei Box Switches
The Hardware Architecture of Huawei Box Switches
The Boards and Modules of Huawei Box Switches
The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Box Switches
The Characteristics of Huawei Box Switches
The Application Scenarios of Huawei Box Switches
Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System Introduction
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 71
Overview of Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System
Networking Architecture of Huawei eSight
Technical Architecture of Huawei eSight
Specifications of Huawei eSight
Huawei Routers / Switches Routine Maintenance
Environment Maintenance
Hardware Maintenance
Software Maintenance
Huawei Routers / Switches Emergency Maintenance
The Concepts of Emergency Maintenance
Common Flows for Emergency Maintenance
Flow for Handling Hardware Faults
Flow for Handling Service Faults
Huawei Routers / Switches Software Upgrade
Common Steps of Software Upgrade
Precautions of Software Upgrade
Steps of Installing Patches
Basic Operations on the Bootrom
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Software Upgrade
Huawei device software hot patch installation
Huawei single master board equipment online upgrade
Huawei dual master board equipment online upgrade
Upgrading equipment from Bootrom menu
Huawei Routers / Switches ISSU Feature Introduction
Principles of ISSU
Application Scenarios of ISSU
Operational Processes of ISSU
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches ISSU Feature
ISSU Operation on Huawei S7700 Switch
Huawei Routers / Switches BFD Features and Configuration
Principles of BFD
Application Scenarios of BFD
Configuration Examples of BFD on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches BFD Feature
BFD configuration
BFD for static route configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
Huawei Routers / Switches Smart-Link Features and Configuration
Principles of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link
Application Scenarios of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link
Configuration Examples of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link on Huawei Devices
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 72
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Smart-Link Feature
Smart-Link Basic Configuration
Smart-Link Multi-Instance Configuration
Smart-Link and Monitor-Link Configuration
Huawei Switches SEP Features and Configuration
Principles of SEP
Application Scenarios of SEP
Configuration Examples of SEP on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches SEP Feature
SEP closed ring configuration
SEP multi-rings configuration
SEP multi-instances configuration
Huawei Switches DLDP Features and Configuration
Principles of DLDP
Application Scenarios of DLDP
Configuration Examples of DLDP on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches DLDP Feature
DLDP Configuration
Huawei Routers / Switches Security Features and Configuration
ACL Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices
Traffic Suppression Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices
Local Attack Defense Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices
IP Anti-Spoofing Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Security Feature
ACL Configuration
Traffic Suppression Configuration
Local Attack Defense Configuration
IP Anti-spoofing Configuration
Huawei Switches Access Security Features and Configuration
Security Threats on the Network Access Layer
Principles of ARP Attack Defense
Principles of MFF
Configuration Examples of ARP Attack Defense on Huawei Switches
Configuration Examples of MFF on Huawei Switches
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches Products Access Security Feature
ARP Security Configuration
MFF Configuration
Huawei Routers / Switches Firewall Features and Configuration
Overview of Firewall
Introduction of Firewall on AR G3 Routers
Introduction of Firewall on SPU of S7700 Switches
Configuration Examples of Firewall on AR G3 Routers
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 73
Configuration Examples of Firewall on SPU of S7700 Switches
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Firewall Feature
Basic Configuration of Firewall on AR G3 Routers
Defense Configuration on AR G3 Routers
Huawei Routers / Switches User Management Features and Configuration
Domain-based User Management on Huawei Devices
Configuration Examples of Telnet Server on Huawei Devices
Configuration Examples of FTP Server / Client on Huawei Devices
Configuration Examples of TFTP Client on Huawei Devices
Configuration Examples of SSH Server on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches User Management Feature
Telnet Server Configuration Using Local Authentication
Telnet Server Configuration Using Radius Authentication
FTP Server Configuration
FTP Client Configuration
TFTP Client Configuration
SSH Server Configuration Using Local Authentication
SSH Server Configuration Using Radius Authentication
Huawei Routers / Switches SNMP Features and Configuration
Principles of SNMP
Configuration Examples of SNMP on Huawei Devices
Steps of Installing Huawei eSight
Basic Operations of Huawei eSight
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches SNMP Feature
Installation of eSight
Using eSight to Manage Devices
Huawei Switches Stacking / CSS Features and Configuration
Principles of Stacking / CSS
Application Scenarios of Stacking / CSS
Configuration Examples of Stacking / CSS on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches Products Stacking / CSS Feature
Stacking Configuration on the S3700 Switch
Stacking Configuration on the S5700 Switch
Huawei Routers / Switches LLDP Features and Configuration
Principles of LLDP
Application Scenarios of LLDP
Configuration Examples of LLDP on Huawei Devices
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches LLDP Feature
LLDP Configuration
Duration
5 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 74
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 75
3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs
3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe basic structure of IP network
Describe TCP/IP basis
Describe IP addressing and routing
Describe network layer protocols
Describe transit layer protocols
Describe application layer protocols
Training Content
ORS11 IP Network Technology Fundamental
IP Network Fundamental
Data traffic basis
Brief introduction of network and internet
Protocol and standard
Basic architecture of IP network
TCP/IP Basis
TCP/IP protocol stack
Data encapsulation of TCP/IP protocol stack
Case analysis
IP Addressing and Routing
IP address
Protocols of network layer
Working principle of router
Network Layer Protocol Introduction
Describe network layer protocols
ARP protocol
ICMP protocol
IP Network Technology Fundamental
ORS11 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 76
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Network Technology Fundamental
Using Wireshark to capture and analyze the IP network packet
Logging in to a device through the console interface and checking device information
Using VLSM to allocate IP address
Ping and Tracert testing
ARP/Proxy ARP testing
Transit Layer Protocol Introduction
TCP basis
UDP basis
Application Layer Protocol Introduction
Application layer protocols basis
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 77
3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Content
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 78
3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the development of Ethernet technology
List the standards of Ethernet
Describe the working principle of HUB
Describe the working principle of L2 switch
Describe the working principle of L3 switch
List the Ethernet port features
Configure the Ethernet interface
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
STP Principle and Configuration
ORS35 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration
ORS34 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
GVRP Principle and Configuration
ORS33 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VLAN Principle and Configuration
ORS32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Ethernet Basic Principle
ORS31 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 79
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe the GARP principle
Describe the GVRP principle
Configure GVRP
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
Describe RSTP basic calculation process
Describe RSTP port status transition
Describe the function of RST BPDU
Describe the flooding process of topology change notification
Configure the RSTP function
Describe the basic concept of MSTP
Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of MST
Describe the MSTP advanced configuration
Configure the MSTP function
Training Content
ORS31 Ethernet Basic Principle
Ethernet overview
The development of Ethernet network
Ethernet transmission medium
Introduction of standards of Ethernet
The working principle of Ethernet network devices
Shared Ethernet
L2 switch working principle
L3 switch working principle
Ethernet ports technologies
Auto negotiation
Flow control
Port mirroring
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet port technologies
Ethernet port technologies basic configuration
ORS32 VLAN Principle and Configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 80
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
VLAN advanced features and configuration
What is the MUX-VLAN
MUX-VLAN configuration and realization
Precautions of MUX-VLAN
Super-VLAN overview
Super-VLAN working principle
Super-VLAN configuration and realization
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features
MUX-VLAN basic configuration
Super VLAN basic configuration
ORS33 GVRP Principle and Configuration
GVRP protocol principle
GARP overview
GVRP overview
GVRP configuration and realization
Hands-on Exercise Guide to GVRP basic principle
GVRP protocol basic configuration
ORS34 Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
ORS35 STP Principle and Configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
RSTP Principle and Configuration
RSTP Basic Calculation Process
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 81
RSTP Port Status Transition
RST BPDU
Topology Change Notification
Hands-on Exercise Guide to configure RSTP feature
RSTP basic configuration
MSTP Principle and Configuration
MSTP basic concept
Path Selection among MST Regions
MSTP Advanced Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MSTP feature
MSTP basic configuration
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 82
3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
List common WAN protocols
List common WAN interfaces
Describe PPP principles
Describe LCP principles
Describe NCP principles
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
Configure PPP authentication
Describe FR principles
Configure FR
Describe POS principles
Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing methods
Identify common optical interfaces
Configure POS interface
Describe HDLC principles
Configure HDLC
Training Content
ORS41 WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
WAN Interfaces Introduction
Common WAN protocols
Common WAN interfaces
PPP and MP Principles and Configuration
FR/POS/HDLC Principles and Configuration
ORS42 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
ORS41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 83
Protocol overview and data encapsulation
Link control protocol
PPP authentication protocol
Network control protocol
PPP-MP principle and configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PPP and MP
PPP PAP authentication
PPP CHAP authentication
ORS42 FR/POS/HDLC Principles and Configuration
FR Principle and Configuration
FR overview
FR Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to FR
FR basic configuration
FR sub-interface configuration
POS Principles and Configuration
POS technology
SDH frame structure and multiplexing methods
Optical interfaces introduce
POS interface Configuration
HDLC Principles and Configuration
Protocol overview and data encapsulation
Configuration of HDLC
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 84
3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Route Selection and Control Feature
ORS56 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
BGP Feature and Configuration
ORS55 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IS-IS Feature and Configuration
ORS54 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
OSPF Feature and Configuration
ORS53 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
RIP Protocol Feature and Configuration
ORS52 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Basis
ORS51 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 85
Describe the principles of distance-vector routing protocols
Describe the routing loop issues and apply loop avoidance solutions
Describe the principles of RIP protocols
Identify the similarities and differences between RIPv1 and RIPv2
Configure RIP in the network
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor relationship
Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol
Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol
Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols
Configure IS-IS protocol
Describe BGP basic concepts
Describe BGP working principles
Describe the route selection process of BGP
Configure BGP protocol
Describe route selection tools
Describe routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Compare routing policy and policy-based route
Configure routing policy
Training Content
ORS51 IP Routing Basis
Routing Protocol Basis
IP routing overview
Static route
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route
Configure static route
Configure static default route
ORS52 RIP Protocol Feature and Configuration
RIP Feature and Configuration
Distance-vector routing protocol overview
RIP routing protocol
Hands-on Exercise Guide to RIP Protocol
RIPv1/v2 Configuration
RIPv2 route aggregation and authentication
ORS53 OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration
OSPF Feature and Configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 86
OSPF overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
Application scenarios of OSPF
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Routing Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
ORS54 ISIS Protocol Feature and Configuration
IS-IS Feature and Configuration
IS-IS overview
Basic concepts of IS-IS
IS-IS route calculation process
Comparing IS-IS and OSPF
IS-IS configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IS-IS Protocol
Configure single IS-IS area
Configure multi-area IS-IS network
Configure IS-IS level
Configure DIS electing of IS-IS
Configure IS-IS route import and convergence
Configure IS-IS silent port
ORS55 BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
ORS56 Route Selection and Control Feature
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 87
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 88
3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe basic structure of IP network
Describe TCP/IP basis
Describe IP addressing and routing
Describe network layer protocols
OSPF Feature and Configuration
ORS53 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Basics
ORS51 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration
ORS34 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VLAN Principle and Configuration
ORS32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Network Technology Fundamental
ORS11 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 89
Describe transit layer protocols
Describe application layer protocols
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP info- center
Perform VRP operate files
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF neighbor relationship
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Training Content
ORS11 IP Network Technology Fundamental
IP Network Fundamental
Data traffic basis
Brief introduction of network and internet
Protocol and standard
Basic architecture of IP network
TCP/IP Basis
TCP/IP protocol stack
Data encapsulation of TCP/IP protocol stack
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 90
Case analysis
IP Addressing and Routing
IP address
Protocols of network layer
Working principle of router
Network Layer Protocol Introduction
Describe network layer protocols
ARP protocol
ICMP protocol
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Network Technology Fundamental
Using Wireshark to capture and analyze the IP network packet
Logging in to a device through the console interface and checking device information
Using VLSM to allocate IP address
Ping and Tracert testing
ARP/Proxy ARP testing
Transit Layer Protocol Introduction
TCP basis
UDP basis
Application Layer Protocol Introduction
Application layer protocols basis
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS32 VLAN Principle and Configuration
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on exercise Guide to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 91
VLAN advanced features and configuration
What is the MUX-VLAN
MUX-VLAN configuration and realization
Precautions of MUX-VLAN
Super-VLAN overview
Super-VLAN working principle
Super-VLAN configuration and realization
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features
MUX-VLAN basic configuration
Super VLAN basic configuration
ORS34 Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
ORS51 IP Routing Basis
Routing Protocol Basis
IP routing overview
Static route
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route
Configure static route
Configure static default route
ORS53 OSPF Feature and Configuration
OSPF Feature and Configuration
OSPF overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
Application scenarios of OSPF
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Routing Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
Duration
5 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 92
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 93
3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs
3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the IP multicast concept
Describe the IP multicast address architecture
Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP multicast
Describe the SPT and RPT concept
Describe the IGMP protocol principle
Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions
Configure the IGMP protocol
Differentiate the classification of multicast routing protocol
List the features of common multicast routing protocols
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast source registration
Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT to SPT
Configure PIM-SM
Inter-domain Multicast Technologies
ORSA3 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
ORSA2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Multicast Technologies Basis
ORSA1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 94
List the key technologies of PIM SSM
Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Configure PIM SSM
Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Configure PIM-DM
Describe the basic principles of MSDP.
Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.
Describe the application of MSDP
Configure the MSDP
Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.
Describe the extensions of the MBGP.
Describe the process that the MBGP transmit the IPv4 multicast routing table.
Configure the MBGP
Training Content
ORSA1 IP Multicast Technologies basis
IP Multicast Basis
Introduction to Multicast
Multicast Address Structure
Multicast Basic Principle
Multicast Data Forwarding
IGMP Protocol Principle
IGMP protocol introduction
IGMP protocol working principle
IGMP Snooping principle
IGMP protocol configuration
IGMP Snooping configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IGMP protocol
IGMP basic configuration
IGMP Snooping configuration
ORSA2 IP Multicast Routing Technologies
Multicast routing protocols introduction
Overview of Multicast Routing Protocol
Intra-domain Multicast Routing Protocol
Inter-domain Multicast Routing Protocol
PIM-SM protocol principle
PIM-SM Overview and Basic Configuration
PIM-SM Protocol Mechanism
PIM-SM Advanced Configuration
PIM-SM protocol configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SM
PIM-SM configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 95
PIM-SSM protocol principle
PIM-SSM key technologies
PIM-SSM working principle
PIM-SSM configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SSM
PIM-SSM configuration
PIM-DM protocol principle
PIM-DM overview and configuration
PIM-DM protocol mechanism
PIM-DM protocol configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-DM
PIM-DM configuration
ORSA3 Inter-domain Multicast Technologies
MSDP protocol principle
Overview of MSDP
Peer-RPF Check
Packet Format / State Machine
Application of MSDP
MSDP Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MSDP protocol
MSDP protocol configuration
MBGP protocol principle
Overview of The MBGP
MBGP Capability Negotiation
MBGP NLRI Exchange
MBGP Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MBGP
MBGP protocol configuration
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 96
3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe concepts of IP VPN
List common VPN technologies
Describe GRE principles
Describe GRE application scenarios
Configure GRE VPN
Describe concepts of LAC and LNS
Describe L2TP principles
Describe L2TP application scenarios
Configure L2TP VPN
Describe IPSec technical architecture
Describe IKE principles
Maintaining IP VPN
ORSB4 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Designing IP VPN
ORSB3 0.5d Lecture
IP VPN Applications
ORSB2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP VPN Technology Fundamentals
ORSB1 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 97
Describe IPSec principles
Describe IPSec application scenarios
Configure IPSec VPN
Describe SSL principles
Describe SSL application scenarios
Configure SSL VPN
Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN
Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution
Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3 routers
List Problems When Deploy VPNs
Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment and the solution
Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment and the solution
Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment and the solution
Describe GRE over IPSec applications
Describe IPSec over GRE applications
Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over GRE
Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3 routers
Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3 routers
Describe security risks of VPDN
Describe common VPDN solutions
Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over IPSec
Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3 routers
Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3 routers
Describe requirements when deploy VPN on Hub-Spoke network
Describe Huawei DSVPN solution
Describe DSVPN principles
Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers
List Huawei IP VPN products
Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei routers
Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei switches
Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei firewalls
Describe Huawei eSight VPN management features
Describe Huawei VPN client features
Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of different products
Describe applications of different products in IP VPN
Describe methodology of network designing
Analyze enterprise VPN requirements
Describe typical VPN application
Choose appropriate devices and technology for enterprise VPN
Describe eSight VPN management features
Use eSight basic functions
Use eSight VPN management functions
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 98
Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
List common reasons of IP VPN failure
List common commands when troubleshooting IP VPN
Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases
Training Content
ORSB1 IP VPN Technology Fundamentals
IP VPN Overview
Concepts of IP VPN
Common IP VPNs
GRE Principles and Configuration
GRE principles
GRE application scenarios
GRE configuration
L2TP Principles and Configuration
L2TP principles
L2TP application scenarios
L2TP configuration
IPSec Principles and Configuration
IPSec architecture
IKE principles
IPSec application scenarios
IPSec configuration
SSL Principles and Configuration
SSL principles
SSL VPN application scenarios
SSL VPN configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Basics
GRE VPN configuration
L2TP VPN configuration
IPSec VPN configuration(manual mode)
IPSec VPN configuration(IKE mode)
SSL VPN configuration
ORSB2 IP VPN Applications
Huawei Efficient VPN
Difficulties in IPSec VPN deployment
Huawei Efficient VPN solution
Huawei Efficient VPN configuration
Deploying IP VPN
VPN traversing NAT
Affections of PMTU on VPN deployment
QoS of VPN
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 99
GRE and IPSec
GRE over IPSec applications
IPSec over GRE applications
Configuration of GRE over IPSec
Configuration of IPSec over GRE
Deploying Secure VPDN
L2TP and VPDN
Security of L2TP
IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over IPSec
Configuration of IPSec over L2TP
Configuration of L2TP over IPSec
Deploying Dynamic Smart VPN(DSVPN)
VPN on Hub-Spoke network
Huawei DSVPN solution
Configuration of DSVPN
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Advanced Applications
Configuring Efficient VPN
Configuring GRE over IPSec
Configuring IPSec over GRE
Configuring L2TP over IPSec
Configuring IPSec over L2TP
Configuring DSVPN
ORSB3 Designing IP VPN
Huawei IP VPN Products Introduction
Huawei network and security products introduction
VPN features supported by Huawei products
Designing IP VPN
General principles when designing IP VPN
Requirements analysis for enterprise VPNs
Typical VPN applications
Choosing appropriate devices and technology
ORSB4 Maintaining IP VPN
Maintaining IP VPN with Huawei eSight
eSight products introduction
eSight IPSec VPN management
IP VPN Troubleshooting
Basic ideas of IP VPN troubleshooting
Common reasons of VPN failure
Common troubleshooting commands
Typical troubleshooting cases
Hands-on Exercise Guide to eSight
Huawei eSight VPN Management Operation
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 100
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Troubleshooting
GRE Troubleshooting
L2TP Troubleshooting
IPSec Troubleshooting
DSVPN Troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 101
3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
List the applications of MPLS
Describe MPLS structure feature that contains two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Describe the process of LDP session establishment
Describe LDP label space
MPLS L3VPN Extended Application
ORSD3 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration
ORSD2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
ORSD1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
MPLS Technology and Configuration
ORSC1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 102
Describe LDP label distribution mode
Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
Describe the PHP
List the methods of MPLS loop detection
Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop count
Configure MPLS
Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of MPLS BGP VPN
Describe VPN Characteristics
Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN and L3 VPN
Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data encapsulation
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific scenario
Describe CCC VLL Topology
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC mode
Configure CCC in a simple network topology
Describe Martini VLL Topology
Describe how public tunnel and VC connection are established in Martini VLL
Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini VLL
Describe the difference between Martini VLL and SVC VLL
Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple networking topology
Describe the features of VPLS
Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and VC Label
Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid loop
Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology
Configure VPLS
Describe how to access the Internet via the ISP
Describe how to access the Internet via the MPLS VPN backbone
Describe how to access the Internet via different interfaces between CE and PE
Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF VPN
Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF routing information
Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 103
Analyze the application and configuration of Sham-link
Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS solutions
Compare the three solutions’ processing in control plane and data plane
Training Content
ORSC1 MPLS Technology and Configuration
MPLS Basic Concepts and Application
Traditional IP Forwarding
MPLS Forwarding Feature
MPLS Applications
MPLS Basic Principle
MPLS Basic Structure
MPLS Label Format
MPLS Forwarding Process
LDP Neighbor Discovery and Session Establishment
LDP Basic Concept
LDP Neighbor Discovery Mechanism
The Process of LDP Session Establishment
LDP Label Management
LDP Label Space
LDP Label Distribution
LDP Label Control
LDP Label Retention
PHP
MPLS Loop Detection
MPLS TTL Loop Detection
LDP Loop Detection
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS Technology
MPLS basic configuration
ORSD1 MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration
VPN Technologies Overview
VPN concept and VPN types
MPLS BGP VPN Basic Principle
MPLS BGP VPN model
Basic concepts of MPLS BGP VPN
The mechanisms of the route and label distribution of MPLS BGP VPN
The data forwarding process of MPLS BGP VPN
MPLS BGP VPN Configuration and Realization
Configure VPN-instance
Configure PE-CE BGP
Configure MP-BGP
Configure the Routing Protocols Used by PE-CE
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 104
MPLS BGP VPN Troubleshooting
Basic Principle Review
Troubleshooting on Control Plane
Troubleshooting on Data Plane
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN
MPLS BGP VPN basic configuration
HUB/Spoke network configuration
ORSD2 MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration
MPLS L2 VPN Overview
What is VPN and VPN Classification
MPLS L2 VPN and MPLS L3 VPN Comparison
MPLS L2 VPN Architecture and Data Forwarding
VPWS Reference Model
VPLS Reference Model
Advantages of MPLS L2 VPN
CCC VLL
CCC Topology
Data Forwarding
Configuration Example
Martini VLL and SVC VLL
Martini VLL Topology
VC Connection
Data Forwarding
Configuration Example
VPLS
VPLS Overview
VPLS Components
VPLS Signaling
Data Encapsulation
Mac Address Learning and Withdrawal
Loop Avoidance
Configuration Example
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPWS
Local CCC connection configuration
Remote CCC connection configuration
MARTINI VLL connection configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPLS
KOMPELLA VPLS configuration
MARTINI VPLS Configuration
ORSD3 MPLS L3VPN Extended Application
MPLS VPN Subscribers Access Internet
Internet Access via the ISP
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 105
Internet Access via the MPLS VPN Backbone
Internet Access via Different Interfaces Between CE and PE
OSPF Multi-Instances and MPLS VPN
OSPF VPN Three-level Hierarchy
Routing Information Propagation and Configuration
Sham-link Application and Configuration
MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solutions
Background in MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solution
VRF-to-VRF (Option A)
Single-hop MP-eBGP (Option B)
Multi-hop MP-eBGP (Option C)
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS VPN Subscribers Access Internet
Internet access via the ISP
Internet access via different interfaces between CE and PE
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solutions
BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option A
BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option B
BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option C
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 106
3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe detailed TE concepts and models
Describe MPLS TE background and functional modules
Describe the content of MPLS TE information distribution
Describe the way of MPLS TE information flooding
Describe the process of MPLS TE information distribution
Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm
Describe the other constrained conditions which influence the process of path calculation
Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE
Describe the basic and extension principle of RSVP protocol
Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE using static routes
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE using automatic route
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using policy routing
Describe the mode of traffic protection
Describe the principle of path protection
Describe the principle of fast reroute
Describe DS-TE functions
Describe DS-TE applicable environment
Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption
Describe the rationale of Tunnel Re-optimization
Describe the rationale of Load Sharing
Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth Adjustment
Describe the combining of MPLS TE with MPLS VPN
MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration
3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ORSE1
1
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 107
Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
List MPLS TE application
Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
Training Content
ORSE1 MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration
MPLS TE Overview
What is TE
MPLS TE
MPLS TE Information Distribution
Content of MPLS TE information distribution
MPLS TE information flooding
The process of MPLS TE information distribution
MPLS TE Path Calculation
Path Calculation of CSPF
Other Constrained Conditions
RSVP Principle and Extensibility for TE
The Signaling Protocol
Introduce RSVP Protocol
MPLS TE Path Setup
The Signaling Protocol
The Path Setup Process
MPLS TE Traffic Forwarding
MPLS TE Traffic Forwarding Overview
Static Route Forwarding
Automatic Route Forwarding
Policy Route Forwarding
MPLS TE Traffic Protection
Traffic Protection Overview
Path Protection
Fast Reroute
Comparison of Path Protection and Fast Reroute
QoS of MPLS TE
DS-TE Principles
DS-TE Typical Applications
MPLS TE Advanced Features
Tunnel Preemption
Tunnel Re-optimization
Load Sharing
Automatic Bandwidth Adjustment
Combine MPLS TE with MPLS VPN
MPLS TE Application Cases
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 108
Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
List MPLS TE application
Design MPLS TE according to the requirement
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS TE
Static CR-LSP configuration
RSVP-TE tunnel configuration
CR-LSP backup configuration
MPLS TE FRR configuration
MPLS BGP VPN FRR configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Integrated MPLS TE
MPLS TE integrated practice
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 109
3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
Training Content
ORSF1 IP QoS Technology
IP QoS Feature Description and configuration
IP QoS overview
Diff-Serv model basis
IP QoS technology basis
IP QoS application on the enterprise network
Classed-based QoS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature
Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification
Interface-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic shaping configuration
Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 110
3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Training Content
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 111
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 112
3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6
Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6 packet format
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
Describe the packet types of ICMPv6
Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process
Describe the working principle of IPv6 address auto configuration
Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU
Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS
Configure IPv6 address
Configure IPv6 NDP
Configure IPv6 PMTU
Configure IPv6 application
Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6 unicast packets
Describe the principle of RIPng
Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2
Describe the format and processing of RIPng packets
Configure RIPng
Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2
Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of OSPFv3 with OSPFv2
Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation
Configure OSPFv3
Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology
IPv6 Training
5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ORSH1
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 113
Configure IS-ISv6
Describe MP-BGP attributes
Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6 inter-domain routing
Configure BGP+
Describe the function and basic principle of MLD
Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2
Describe the function of SSM Mapping
Configure MLD
Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM
Describe the address structure and working principle of Embedded-RP
Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast
Configure PIMv6
List classification of the ACL6
Describe the application scenarios of ACL6
Configure ACL6
List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6
Describe application situations of the transitional technologies of IPv6
Describe basic principles of the common transitional technologies of IPv6
Configure common transitional technologies of IPv6
Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
Configure 6PE over MPLS
Training Content
ORSH1 IPv6 Technology
IPv6 Basis
Developments of IPv6
IPv6 address
IPv6 packets
IPv6 Basic Principle
ICMPv6 protocol
IPv6 neighbor discovery
IPv6 address configuration
IPv6 PMTU discovery
IPv6 DNS
IPv6 Configuration
IPv6 address configuration
IPv6 NDP configuration
IPv6 PMTU configuration
IPv6 application
Maintenance of IPv6
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 114
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Configuration
Configure IPv6 address
RIPng Principle and Realization
IPv6 unicast packets forwarding
Basic principle of RIPng
Difference between RIPng and RIPv2
Processing of RIPng packets
RIPng configurations
Hands-on Exercise Guide to RIPng Principle and Realization
IPv6 static route configuration
RIPng routing protocol configuration
OSPFv3 Principle and Realization
Differences between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3
OSPFv3 protocol packet
LSA introduction
Protocol operation
OSPFv3 configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPFv3
OSPFv3 area configuration
OSPFv3 aggregation configuration
OSPFv3 virtual-Link configuration
IS-ISv6 Principle and Realization
Overview
IS-IS protocol extensions
IPv6 support in IS-IS ST environment
IPv6 support in IS-IS MT environment
IS-ISv6 configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IS-ISv6
IS-ISv6 multi-area configuration
IS-ISv6 authentication
IS-ISv6 load sharing and route leaking
MP-BGP for IPv6 Principle and Realization
MP-BGP
MP-BGP for IPv6
MP-BGP for IPv6 basic configuration
Building Large-Scale Network Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP4+
BGP4+ basic configuration
BGP4+ router reflector
BGP4+ confederation
BGP4+ COMMUNITY Attribute
MLD Principle
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 115
MLD overview
MLDv1
MLDv2
SSM mapping
IPv6 Multicast Realization
IPv6 PIM-SM principle mechanism
Working principle of embedded-RP
Working principle of IPv6 PIM-SSM
Typical application of IPv6 multicast
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Multicast
P configuration of MLD
IPv6 PIM Configuration
IPv6 ACL
Classification of ACL6
Match order of ACL6
ACL6 creation
Configuration instances
Hands-on Exercise Guide to ACL6
Configure basic ACL6
Configure advanced ACL6
Configure ACL6 based on interface
IPv6 Transit Technologies Principle and Realization
Introduction to the transitional technologies of IPv6
IPv6/IPv4 coexistence technology
IPv6/IPv4 interconnection technology
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Transit Technologies
IPv6 over IPv4 manual tunnel configuration
IPv6 over IPv4 GRE tunnel configuration
IPv6 over IPv4 automatic tunnel configuration
IPv6 over IPv4 6to4 tunnel
IPv6 over IPv4 6to4 relay
NAT-PT dynamic configuration
IPv6 over MPLS(6PE) Principle and Realization
Overview of the 6PE over MPLS
Principle of the 6PE over MPLS
Basic configuration of the 6PE over MPLS
Configuration instance of the 6PE over MPLS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 over MPLS(6PE)
IPv6 over MPLS(6PE) basic configuration
Duration
5 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 116
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 117
3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs
3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE series routers installation process
List precautions when install NE series routers
Install NE series routers
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Training Content
ORT22 NE Series Routers Hardware Installation
NE Series Routers Hardware Installation
NE Series Routers overview
NE Series Routers installation precautions
NE Series Routers installation steps
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NE Series Routers Hardware Installation
ORT22 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 118
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 119
3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE series routers hardware structure
Describe NE series routers board types and functions
Identify NE series routers board
Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions
Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios
Describe NE series routers features Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance
Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction
NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction
NE40E-X routers hardware architecture
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23 0.5d Lecture
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NE Series Routers Introduction
ORT21 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 120
NE40E-X routers board types
NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features
NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description
NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios
NE5000E/80E/40E route features
NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features
NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features
NE5000E/80E/40E HA features
NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction
NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 121
3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M
Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23 0.5d Lecture
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
MPLS VPN Technologies
ORSDA 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Technologies (A)
ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NE Series Routers Introduction
ORT21 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 122
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE series routers hardware structure
Describe NE series routers board types and functions
Identify NE series routers board
Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions
Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios
Describe NE series routers features Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Configure routing policy
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
List the applications of MPLS
Describe MPLS structure feature that contains two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Describe the process of LDP session establishment
Describe LDP label space
Describe LDP label distribution mode
Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 123
Describe the PHP
List the methods of MPLS loop detection
Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop count
Configure MPLS
Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of MPLS BGP VPN
Describe VPN Characteristics
Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN and L3 VPN
Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data encapsulation
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific scenario
Describe CCC VLL Topology
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC mode
Configure CCC in a simple network topology
Describe Martini VLL Topology
Describe how public tunnel and VC connection are established in Martini VLL
Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini VLL
Describe the difference between Martini VLL and SVC VLL
Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple networking topology
Describe the features of VPLS
Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and VC Label
Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid loop
Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology
Configure VPLS
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 124
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance
Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction
NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction
NE40E-X routers hardware architecture
NE40E-X routers board types
NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features
NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description
NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios
NE5000E/80E/40E route features
NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features
NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features
NE5000E/80E/40E HA features
NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 125
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
ORSDA MPLS VPN Technologies
MPLS Basic Concepts and Application
Traditional IP Forwarding
MPLS Forwarding Feature
MPLS Applications
MPLS Basic Principle
MPLS Basic Structure
MPLS Label Format
MPLS Forwarding Process
LDP Neighbor Discovery and Session Establishment
LDP Basic Concept
LDP Neighbor Discovery Mechanism
The Process of LDP Session Establishment
LDP Label Management
LDP Label Space
LDP Label Distribution
LDP Label Control
LDP Label Retention
PHP
MPLS Loop Detection
MPLS TTL Loop Detection
LDP Loop Detection
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 126
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS Technology
MPLS basic configuration
VPN Technologies Overview
VPN concept and VPN types
MPLS BGP VPN Basic Principle
MPLS BGP VPN model
Basic concepts of MPLS BGP VPN
The mechanisms of the route and label distribution of MPLS BGP VPN
The data forwarding process of MPLS BGP VPN
MPLS BGP VPN Configuration and Realization
Configure VPN-instance
Configure PE-CE BGP
Configure MP-BGP
Configure the Routing Protocols Used by PE-CE
MPLS BGP VPN Troubleshooting
Basic Principle Review
Troubleshooting on Control Plane
Troubleshooting on Data Plane
Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN
MPLS BGP VPN basic configuration
HUB/Spoke network configuration
MPLS L2 VPN Overview
What is VPN and VPN Classification
MPLS L2 VPN and MPLS L3 VPN Comparison
MPLS L2 VPN Architecture and Data Forwarding
VPWS Reference Model
VPLS Reference Model
Advantages of MPLS L2 VPN
CCC VLL
CCC Topology
Data Forwarding
Configuration Example
Martini VLL and SVC VLL
Martini VLL Topology
VC Connection
Data Forwarding
Configuration Example
VPLS
VPLS Overview
VPLS Components
VPLS Signaling
Data Encapsulation
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 127
Mac Address Learning and Withdrawal
Loop Avoidance
Configuration Example
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPWS
Local CCC connection configuration
Remote CCC connection configuration
MARTINI VLL connection configuration
Hands-on Exercises to VPLS
KOMPELLA VPLS configuration
MARTINI VPLS Configuration
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORSF1 IP QoS Technology
IP QoS Feature Description and configuration
IP QoS overview
Diff-Serv model basis
IP QoS technology basis
IP QoS application on the enterprise network
Classed-based QoS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature
Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification
Interface-based traffic policing configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 128
Classed-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic shaping configuration
Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration
ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction
NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 129
3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE series routers hardware structure
Describe NE series routers board types and functions
Identify NE series routers board
Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions
Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios
Describe NE series routers features Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23 0.5d Lecture
IP Routing Technologies (A)
ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NE Series Routers Introduction
ORT21 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 130
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Configure routing policy
List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance
Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction
NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction
NE40E-X routers hardware architecture
NE40E-X routers board types
NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features
NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description
NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios
NE5000E/80E/40E route features
NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features
NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features
NE5000E/80E/40E HA features
NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 131
FTP operation
ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction
NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 132
3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware structure
Describe NE20E-S series routers board types and functions
Identify NE20E-S series routers board
Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators and functions
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning and application scenarios
Describe NE20E-S series routers features Overview
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT43 1d Lecture
IP Routing Technologies (A)
ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction
ORT41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 133
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Configure routing policy
List precautions for NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance
Perform NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT41 NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction
NE20E-S Product Hardware Introduction
NE20E-S routers hardware architecture
NE20E-S routers board types
NE20E-S routes board functions and specifications features
VRP8 platform introduction and operation
Development of VRP and background of VRP8
VRP8 features
VRP8 basic operation
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation
Basic commands of VRP8 operation
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Management of configuration file of CE switch
Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch
ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)
Routing Protocol Basis
IP routing overview
Static route
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route
Configure static route
Configure static default route
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 134
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
ORT43 NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance items introduction
NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance operation direction
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 135
3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe AR G3 router installation process
List precautions when install AR G3 routers
Install AR G3 routers
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Training Content
ORT12 AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation
AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation
AR G3 routers overview
AR G3 routers installation precautions
AR G3 routers installation steps
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation
ORT12 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 136
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 137
3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
List AR G3 cards and modules
List AR G3 software features
Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction
AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction
AR G3 router product positioning
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13 0.5d Lecture
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 138
AR G3 router hardware architecture
AR G3 router cards and modules
AR G3 router data forwarding flows
AR G3 router characteristics
AR G3 router typical networking AR G3
AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction
AR G3 router software architecture
LAN / WAN features
IP service features
IP routing features
MPLS features
Multicast features
QoS features
Security features
VPN features
High-reliability features
Management features
Voice features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 router routine maintenance overview
AR G3 router routine maintenance items
AR G3 router routine maintenance risks
AR G3 router maintenance commands
AR G3 router parts replacement
Duration
2 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 139
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 140
3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic
O&M Training)
Training Path
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13 0.5d Lecture
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Technologies (A)
ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
ORS41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (B)
ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 141
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
List AR G3 cards and modules
List AR G3 software features
Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
List common WAN protocols
List common WAN interfaces
Describe PPP principles
Describe LCP principles
Describe NCP principles
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
Configure PPP authentication
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 142
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Configure routing policy
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
Describe NAT principles
List NAT features on AR G3 routers
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
Describe NAT applications
Describe concepts of firewall
List common firewalls
List firewall features on AR G3 routers
Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction
AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction
AR G3 router product positioning
AR G3 router hardware architecture
AR G3 router cards and modules
AR G3 router data forwarding flows
AR G3 router characteristics
AR G3 router typical networking AR G3
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 143
AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction
AR G3 router software architecture
LAN / WAN features
IP service features
IP routing features
MPLS features
Multicast features
QoS features
Security features
VPN features
High-reliability features
Management features
Voice features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS3B LAN Technologies
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 144
ORS41 WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
WAN Interfaces Introduction
Common WAN protocols
Common WAN interfaces
PPP and MP Principles and Configuration
Protocol overview and data encapsulation
Link control protocol
PPP authentication protocol
Network control protocol
PPP-MP principle and configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PPP and MP
PPP PAP authentication
PPP CHAP authentication
Multilink PPP
ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 145
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORSF1 IP QoS Technology
IP QoS Feature Description and configuration
IP QoS overview
Diff-Serv model basis
IP QoS technology basis
IP QoS application on the enterprise network
Classed-based QoS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature
Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification
Interface-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic shaping configuration
Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration
ORT14 AR G3 Security Features
AR G3 Routers NAT Features
NAT principles
AR G3 NAT features
AR G3 NAT configuration
NAT applications in enterprise network
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 146
Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers NAT Features
Easy IP configuration
Configuring NAT outbound will IP pool
NAT Server configuration
AR G3 Routers Firewall Features
Firewall principles
Common firewalls
AR G3 routers firewall features
AR G3 routers firewall configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers Firewall Features
Configuring secure domain and ACL
Configuring black-list
Configuring port mapping and ASPF
ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 router routine maintenance overview
AR G3 router routine maintenance items
AR G3 router routine maintenance risks
AR G3 router maintenance commands
AR G3 router parts replacement
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 147
3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
List AR G3 cards and modules
List AR G3 software features
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13 0.5d Lecture
AR G3 Security Features
ORT14 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Technologies (B)
ORS5B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 148
Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe NAT principles
List NAT features on AR G3 routers
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
Describe NAT applications
Describe concepts of firewall
List common firewalls
List firewall features on AR G3 routers
Configure firewall on AR G3 routers
Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction
AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction
AR G3 router product positioning
AR G3 router hardware architecture
AR G3 router cards and modules
AR G3 router data forwarding flows
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 149
AR G3 router characteristics
AR G3 router typical networking
AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction
AR G3 router software architecture
LAN / WAN features
IP service features
IP routing features
MPLS features
Multicast features
QoS features
Security features
VPN features
High-reliability features
Management features
Voice features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 150
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORT14 AR G3 Security Features
AR G3 Routers NAT Features
NAT principles
AR G3 NAT features
AR G3 NAT configuration
NAT applications in enterprise network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers NAT Features
Easy IP configuration
Configuring NAT outbound will IP pool
NAT Server configuration
AR G3 Routers Firewall Features
Firewall principles
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 151
Common firewalls
AR G3 routers firewall features
AR G3 routers firewall configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers Firewall Features
Configuring secure domain and ACL
Configuring black-list
Configuring port mapping and ASPF
ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 router routine maintenance overview
AR G3 router routine maintenance items
AR G3 router routine maintenance risks
AR G3 router maintenance commands
AR G3 router parts replacement
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 152
3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe NE series routers hardware structure
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT13 0.25d Lecture
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT23 0.25d Lecture
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Technologies (B)
ORS5B 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR G3 Product Introduction
ORT11 0.5d Lecture
NE Series Routers Introduction
ORT21 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 153
Describe NE series routers board types and functions
Identify NE series routers board
Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions
Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios
Describe NE series routers features Overview
Describe AR G3 product positioning
Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
List AR G3 cards and modules
List AR G3 software features
Describe AR G3 application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance
Perform NE series routers routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 154
NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction
NE40E-X routers hardware architecture
NE40E-X routers board types
NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features
NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description
NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios
NE5000E/80E/40E route features
NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features
NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features
NE5000E/80E/40E HA features
NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features
ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction
AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction
AR G3 router product positioning
AR G3 router hardware architecture
AR G3 router cards and modules
AR G3 router data forwarding flows
AR G3 router characteristics
AR G3 router typical networking
AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction
AR G3 router software architecture
LAN / WAN features
IP service features
IP routing features
MPLS features
Multicast features
QoS features
Security features
VPN features
High-reliability features
Management features
Voice features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 155
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 156
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance
NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction
NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction
ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance
AR G3 router routine maintenance overview
AR G3 router routine maintenance items
AR G3 router routine maintenance risks
AR G3 router maintenance commands
AR G3 router parts replacement
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 157
3.5 AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs
3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the Trend of IOT
Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Scenarios
Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Highlights
Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product Positioning
Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product Architecture
List AR Series Industrial Router Modules and Cards
Outline AR Series Industrial Router Application Scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
AR Series Industrial Routers Routine Maintenance
ORT33 0.5d Lecture
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
AR Industrial Router Routing & Switching Features
ORT32 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution
ORT31 1d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 158
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe the procedure and method for AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance
List precautions for Series Industrial router routine maintenance
Perform AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance
Training Content
ORT31 Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Overview
The Trends and Challenges of IOT
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution
Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Scenarios
AR Series Industrial Router Product Introduction
AR Series Industrial Router Product Positioning
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 159
AR Series Industrial Router Product Architecture
AR Series Industrial Router Modules and Cards
AR Series Industrial Router Application Scenarios
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORT32 AR Series Industrial Router Routing and Switching Features
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
Routing Protocol Basis
IP routing overview
Static route
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route
Configure static route
Configure static default route
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 160
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORT33 AR Series Industrial Router Routine Maintenance
AR Series Industrial Router Routine Maintenance
AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance overview
AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance items
AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance risks
AR Series Industrial router maintenance commands
AR Series Industrial router parts replacement
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 161
3.6 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs
3.6.1 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch installation process
List precautions when install chassis switch
Install Huawei chassis switch
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Training Content
OSW12 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation
Huawei chassis switch overview
Huawei chassis switch installation precautions
Huawei chassis switch installation steps
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation
OSW12 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 162
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 163
3.6.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features
Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
OSW13 0.5d Lecture
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
OSW11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 164
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement
Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement
Training Content
OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction
Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction
Huawei chassis switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
MPLS VPN features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS21 Huawei VRP System
VRP System Architecture
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 165
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks
Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands
Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement
Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview
Huawei chassis switch board replacement
Huawei chassis switch cable replacement
Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 166
3.6.3 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O&M Training)
Training Path
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
OSW13 0.5d Lecture
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) CSS Features
OSW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features
OSW14 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
HA Technology
ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Routing Technologies (A)
ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (C)
ORS3C 2.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
OSW11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 167
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features
Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 168
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route
Describe route selection tools and routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Configure routing policy
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
Describe ISSU principles
List ISSU features on Huawei chassis switch
List ISSU features use restriction on Huawei chassis switch
Use ISSU features upgrade chassis switch
Describe CSS principles
List CSS features on Huawei chassis switch
Differentiate mainborad CSS and linecard-direct CSS
Configure Huawei chassis switch CSS features
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement
Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 169
Training Content
OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction
Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction
Huawei chassis switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
MPLS VPN features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS3C LAN Technologies
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 170
VLAN advanced features and configuration
What is the MUX-VLAN
MUX-VLAN configuration and realization
Precautions of MUX-VLAN
Super-VLAN overview
Super-VLAN working principle
Super-VLAN configuration and realization
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features
MUX-VLAN basic configuration
Super VLAN basic configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 171
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
Route Selection and Control Feature
Route selection and control overview
Route selection and control tools
Route selection and control
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature
Route import and routing control
Access control to enterprise data using ACL
ORSG1 HA Technology
HA Overview
The high availability of the network
HA Technologies
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
BFD Technologies
Outline of BFD
Packet structure
Detect principle
Typical application in network
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies
BFD configuration
BFD for OSPF configuration
BFD for BGP configuration
BFD for VRRP configuration
ORSF1 IP QoS Technology
IP QoS Feature Description and configuration
IP QoS overview
Diff-Serv model basis
IP QoS technology basis
IP QoS application on the enterprise network
Classed-based QoS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature
Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 172
Interface-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic shaping configuration
Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration
OSW14 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)ISSU features
ISSU principles
ISSU operational procedure
ISSU feature application scenarios
ISSU features use restriction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)ISSU Features Hands-on Exercise
ISSU equipment upgrade
OSW15 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) CSS Features
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)CSS Features
CSS principles
CSS operational procedure
CSS feature application scenarios
CSS features use restriction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)CSS Features Hands-on Exercise
Mainborad CSS exercise
Linecard-direct CSS exercise
OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks
Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands
Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement
Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview
Huawei chassis switch board replacement
Huawei chassis switch cable replacement
Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 173
3.6.4 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
OSW13 0.5d Lecture
IP Routing Technologies (B)
ORS5B 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (B)
ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product
OSW11 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 174
Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features
Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF
Describe OSPF protocol packets
Describe route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement
Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement
Training Content
OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction
Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 175
Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction
Huawei chassis switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
MPLS VPN features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS3B LAN Technologies
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)
OSPF protocol feature and configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 176
OSPF protocol overview
Basic OSPF concepts
OSPF route calculation
OSPF configuration
OSPF application scenarios
Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol
Single OSPF area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
OSPF special area configuration
External route import configuration
OSPF default route configuration
BGP Feature and Configuration
BGP overview
BGP route transfer process
BGP path control and selection
Configuration of BGP
Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol
IBGP and EBGP
BGP route aggregation
BGP attributes and path selection
OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks
Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands
Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement
Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview
Huawei chassis switch board replacement
Huawei chassis switch cable replacement
Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 177
3.6.5 S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning
Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware architecture
Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and modules
Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding
List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics
List S12700 Agile Switches software features
S12700 Series Agile Switches Routine Maintenance
OSW54 0.5d Lecture
S Switches EasyOperation Solution
OSW53 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
S Switches New Technologies
OSW52 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction
OSW51 0.5d Lecture, Demo
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 178
Describe S12700 Agile Switches application scenarios
Describe VRP architecture
Use VRP basic commands
Describe VRP info-center
Operate VRP files
Describe LNP principles
Configure LNP
Describe VCMP principles
Configure VCMP
Outline EasyOperation principles
Understand related technologies of EasyOperation
Use EasyOperation features to deploy and maintain network
Describe S12700 Agile Switches routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance
List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance
Perform S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for S12700 Agile Switch parts replacement
List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch component replacement
Perform S12700 Agile Switch component replacement
Training Content
OSW51 S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction
S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction
Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 179
OSW52 S Switches New Technologies
LNP principles and application
LNP principles overview
LNP configuration and application
VCMP principles and application
VCMP principles overview
VCMP configuration and application
Hands-on Exercise Guide to LNP principles and application
LNP typical configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VCMP principles and application
VCMP typical configuration
OSW53 S Switches EasyOperation Solution
S Switches EasyOperation Solution
EasyOperation background
EasyOperation realization
EasyOperation applications
Hands-on Exercise Guide to S Switches EasyOperation Solution
EasyOperation deployment
EasyOperation maintenance
OSW54 S12700 Series Agile Switches Routine Maintenance
S12700 Agile Switches routine maintenance
S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance overview
S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance items
S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance risks
S12700 Agile switch maintenance commands
S12700 Agile Switches part replacement
S12700 Agile switch parts replacement overview
S12700 Agile switch board replacement
S12700 Agile switch cable replacement
S12700 Agile switch other parts replacement
Duration
3 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 180
3.6.6 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei box switch installation process
List precautions when install Huawei box switch
Install Huawei box switch
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Training Content
OSW22 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Installation
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Hardware Installation
Huawei box switch overview
Huawei box switch installation precautions
Huawei box switch installation steps
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Installation
OSW22 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 181
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 182
3.6.7 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules
Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
List Huawei box switch characteristic function
List Huawei box switch software features
Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches
List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches
Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
OSW23 0.5d Lecture
Huawei VRP System
ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
OSW21 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 183
Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components
Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components
Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components
Training Content
OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction
Huawei box switch product positioning
Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Huawei box switch cards and modules
Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
Huawei box switch characteristic function
Huawei box switch application scenarios
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction
Huawei box switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance overview
Projects of routine maintenance
Risks of routine maintenance
Common maintenance commands
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 184
Box switches components replacing
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 185
3.6.8 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training
(Including the Basic O&M Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
OSW23 0.5d Lecture
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
OSW24 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VRRP Feature and Configuration
ORSGA 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (A)
ORS3A 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
OSW21 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 186
Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules
Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
List Huawei box switch characteristic function
List Huawei box switch software features
Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
Configure VRRP protocol
List the security risks of network access layer
List ACL types
List the application of ACL
Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei switches
Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches
Configure the prevention of ARP attack
Configure MFF feature
Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches
List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches
Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches
Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components
Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 187
Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components
Training Content
OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction
Huawei box switch product positioning
Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Huawei box switch cards and modules
Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
Huawei box switch characteristic function
Huawei box switch application scenarios
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction
Huawei box switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS3A LAN Technologies
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 188
VLAN advanced features and configuration
What is the MUX-VLAN
MUX-VLAN configuration and realization
Precautions of MUX-VLAN
Super-VLAN overview
Super-VLAN working principle
Super-VLAN configuration and realization
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features
MUX-VLAN basic configuration
Super VLAN basic configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
ORSGA VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
OSW24 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Security risks of network access layer
ACL technology overview
ARP attack principle
MFF feature
Traffic Suppression Feature
Local Defense Feature
Hands-on Exercises Guide to Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Configure ACL for packet filtering
Configure traffic suppression feature
Configure local defense feature
Configure ARP attack defense
Configure MFF feature
OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 189
Routine maintenance overview
Projects of routine maintenance
Risks of routine maintenance
Common maintenance commands
Box switches components replacing
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 190
3.6.9 Campus Switches(S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
OSW23 0.25d Lecture
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
OSW13 0.25d Lecture
VRRP Feature and Configuration
ORSGA 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
OSW24 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (B)
ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei VRP Quickstart
ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
OSW21 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
OSW11 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 191
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features
Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Describe Huawei box switch product positioning
Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules
Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
List Huawei box switch characteristic function
List Huawei box switch software features
Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU
Describe the flood process of topology change information
Configure the STP function
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
List the security risks of network access layer
List ACL types
List the application of ACL
Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei switches
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 192
Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches
List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches
Configure the prevention of ARP attack
Configure MFF feature
Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle
Configure VRRP protocol
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement
List precautions for Huawei chassis switch
Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches
List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches
Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches
Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components
Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components
Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components
Training Content
OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction
Huawei chassis switch product positioning
Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture
Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules
Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows
Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function
Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction
Huawei chassis switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
MPLS VPN features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction
Huawei box switch product positioning
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 193
Huawei box switch hardware architecture
Huawei box switch cards and modules
Huawei box switch data forwarding flows
Huawei box switch characteristic function
Huawei box switch application scenarios
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction
Huawei box switch software architecture
Ethernet features
IP routing features
High-reliability features
QoS features
IP service features
Multicast features
Security features
Management features
ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart
Huawei VRP Quickstart
VRP overview
VRP Basic Configuration
VRP Information Center
VRP file operation
VRP software upgrade
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics
VRP basic operation configuration
Remote device management
Terminal information output control
File system management
FTP operation
ORS3B LAN Technologies
The VLAN basic principle and configuration
VLAN introduction
The application rules of VLAN labels
What is the VLAN routing
Configure the VLAN routing
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis
VLAN basic principle configuration
STP principle and configuration
Problems Caused by Loop
Calculation Process of Spanning Tree
Configuration BPDU
Topology Change Information
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature
STP basic configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 194
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Security risks of network access layer
ACL technology overview
ARP attack principle
MFF feature
Traffic Suppression Feature
Local Defense Feature
Hands-on Exercises Guide to Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature
Configure ACL for packet filtering
Configure traffic suppression feature
Configure local defense feature
Configure ARP attack defense
Configure MFF feature
ORSGA VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP Feature and Configuration
VRRP overview
VRRP principle
VRRP configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature
VRRP basic configuration
Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface
Special VRRP priority configuration
OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items
Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks
Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands
Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement
Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview
Huawei chassis switch board replacement
Huawei chassis switch cable replacement
Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement
OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 195
Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance overview
Projects of routine maintenance
Risks of routine maintenance
Common maintenance commands
Box switches components replacing
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 196
3.7 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs
3.7.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the installation procedure of CE series switch
List the precaution of hardware installation of CE series switch
Install CE series switch
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch
Training Content
OSW34 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Hardware Installation
CE series switches hardware installation
TOR switch hardware installation
CE12800 series switch chassis installation
CE12800 series switch boards installation
CE12800 series switch cables installation
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Hardware Installation
OSW34 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 197
The pre-check before power on
OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction
VRP8 platform introduction and operation
Development of VRP and background of VRP8
VRP8 features
VRP8 basic operation
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation
Basic commands of VRP8 operation
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Management of configuration file of CE switch
Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 198
3.7.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch
Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch
List the features of CE series data center switch
Describe the application of CE series data center switch
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch
Data Center Switch (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
OSW31 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 199
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch
Training Content
OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
CE Series Switch product introduction
CE series data center switch product position
CE series data center switch product architecture
CE series data center switch boards and modules
CE series data center switch data forwarding
CE series data center switch product features
CE series data center switch applications
OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction
VRP8 platform introduction and operation
Development of VRP and background of VRP8
VRP8 features
VRP8 basic operation
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation
Basic commands of VRP8 operation
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Management of configuration file of CE switch
Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch
OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
CE series switch runtime maintenance
The contents of maintenance
The precautions of maintenance
The parts replacement of TOR switch
The parts replacement of CE12800 switch
CE series switch System software upgrade
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 200
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 201
3.7.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Including the Basic O&M Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Data Center Switch (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
IP Multicast Routing Technologies
ORSA2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
LAN Technologies (D)
ORS3D 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Network Key technologies
OSW36 3.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei Data Center Network Solution
OSW33 0.5d Lecture
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
OSW31 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 202
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch
Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch
List the features of CE series data center switch
Describe the application of CE series data center switch
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch
Describe the architecture of data center
Describe the data center development
Describe Huawei data center network solution
Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
Describe FCOE network basic architecture
Describe the FCOE implementation of related technologies
Describe DCB function technical principle
Describe the application in data center network of FCOE
Describe the background of TRILL
Describe the basic concept of TRILL
Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
Describe the application of TRILL in modern network
Configure TRILL protocol
Describe the principle of stack technology
Describe the stack technology realization on CE switch
Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and CE12800 switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on TOR switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on CE12800 switch
Describe background of VS technology
Describe the realization of VS technology
Describe the principle of VS technology
Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE switch
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 203
Describe the background of VM virtual migration
Describe the technologies for VM virtual migration
Describe the procedure of realization of VM virtual migration
Describe the solution of Huawei nCenter network implementation
Describe STP functions
Describe STP implementation
Describe RSTP improvement compared with STP
Describe MSTP calculation
Configure STP, RSTP, MSTP
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Differentiate the classification of multicast routing protocol
List the features of common multicast routing protocols
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM
Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast source registration
Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT to SPT
Configure PIM-SM
List the key technologies of PIM SSM
Describe the working principle of PIM SSM
Configure PIM SSM
Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle
Configure PIM-DM
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch
Training Content
OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
CE Series Switch product introduction
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 204
CE series data center switch product position
CE series data center switch product architecture
CE series data center switch boards and modules
CE series data center switch data forwarding
CE series data center switch product features
CE series data center switch applications
OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction
VRP8 platform introduction and operation
Development of VRP and background of VRP8
VRP8 features
VRP8 basic operation
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation
Basic commands of VRP8 operation
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Management of configuration file of CE switch
Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch
OSW33 Huawei Data Center Network Solution
Data center network solution introduction
Overview of data center network
Development of data center network
Huawei data center network solution
OSW36 Data Center Network Key technologies
CE series switch FCOE feature introduction
The development of data center network
FC SAN network overview
FCOE network overview
FCOE working principle
Huawei FCOE network solution
Hands-on Exercise Guide to FCOE feature
FIP Snooping configuration
DCB function configuration
CE series switch TRILL feature introduction
TRILL technology overview
TRILL protocol mechanism
TRILL network data forwarding
TRILL application in network
TRILL basic configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to TRILL feature
TRILL basic configuration
TRILL route selection control
TRILL security authentication configuration
CE series switch stack feature introduction
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 205
Stack technology overview
The procedure to realize stack
The common applications of stack
Stack system data forwarding and failure switchover
Stack system basic configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to stack feature
Establish the stack system on TOR switch
Join the stack system for TOR switch
Establish the stack system on CE12800 switch
CE series switch VS feature introduction
The background of VS
VS technology overview
VS technology principle
VS basic configuration
VS applications in network
nCenter virtual perception introduction
background of VM virtual migration
the technologies for VM virtual migration
the procedure of VM virtual migration realization
nCenter virtual perception implementation solution
ORS3D LAN Technologies
STP Principle and Configuration
STP Overview
MSTP Overview
MSTP Configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP features
STP basic configuration
RSTP basic configuration
MSTP basic configuration
Ethernet link aggregation
Basic principle of link aggregation
LACP principle
Link aggregation methods
Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation
Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration
Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration
ORSA2 IP Multicast Routing Technologies
Multicast routing protocols introduction
Overview of Multicast Routing Protocol
Intra-domain Multicast Routing Protocol
Inter-domain Multicast Routing Protocol
PIM-SM protocol principle
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 206
PIM-SM Overview and Basic Configuration
PIM-SM Protocol Mechanism
PIM-SM Advanced Configuration
PIM-SM protocol configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SM
PIM-SM configuration
PIM-SSM protocol principle
PIM-SSM key technologies
PIM-SSM working principle
PIM-SSM configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SSM
PIM-SSM configuration
PIM-DM protocol principle
PIM-DM overview and configuration
PIM-DM protocol mechanism
PIM-DM protocol configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-DM
PIM-DM configuration
ORSF1 IP QoS Technology
IP QoS Feature Description and configuration
IP QoS overview
Diff-Serv model basis
IP QoS technology basis
IP QoS application on the enterprise network
Classed-based QoS
Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature
Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification
Interface-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic policing configuration
Classed-based traffic shaping configuration
Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration
OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
CE series switch runtime maintenance
The contents of maintenance
The precautions of maintenance
The parts replacement of TOR switch
The parts replacement of CE12800 switch
CE series switch System software upgrade
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 207
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 208
3.7.4 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance
Training (Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch
Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch
List the features of CE series data center switch
Describe the application of CE series data center switch
Describe the VRP development and history
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Network Key technologies
OSW36 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Huawei Data Center Network Solution
OSW33 0.5d Lecture
VRP8 Platform Introduction
OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
OSW31 0.5d Lecture
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 209
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch
Describe the architecture of data center
Describe the data center development
Describe Huawei data center network solution
Describe FC SAN network basic architecture
Describe FCOE network basic architecture
Describe the FCOE implementation of related technologies
Describe DCB function technical principle
Describe the application in data center network of FCOE
Describe the background of TRILL
Describe the basic concept of TRILL
Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
Describe the application of TRILL in modern network
Configure TRILL protocol
Describe the principle of stack technology
Describe the stack technology realization on CE switch
Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and CE12800 switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on TOR switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on CE12800 switch
Describe background of VS technology
Describe the realization of VS technology
Describe the principle of VS technology
Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE switch
Describe the background of VM virtual migration
Describe the technologies for VM virtual migration
Describe the procedure of realization of VM virtual migration
Describe the solution of Huawei data center network implementation
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch
Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 210
Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch
Training Content
OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction
CE Series Switch product introduction
CE series data center switch product position
CE series data center switch product architecture
CE series data center switch boards and modules
CE series data center switch data forwarding
CE series data center switch product features
CE series data center switch applications
OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction
VRP8 platform introduction and operation
Development of VRP and background of VRP8
VRP8 features
VRP8 basic operation
Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation
Basic commands of VRP8 operation
Configure the remote management function on CE switch
Management of configuration file of CE switch
Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch
OSW33 Huawei Data Center Network Solution
Data center network solution introduction
Overview of data center network
Development of data center network
Huawei data center network solution
OSW36 Data Center Network Key technologies
CE series switch FCOE feature introduction
The development of data center network
FC SAN network overview
FCOE network overview
FCOE working principle
Huawei FCOE network solution
Hands-on Exercise Guide to FCOE feature
FIP Snooping configuration
DCB function configuration
CE series switch TRILL feature introduction
TRILL technology overview
TRILL protocol mechanism
TRILL network data forwarding
TRILL application in network
TRILL basic configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 211
Hands-on Exercise Guide to TRILL feature
TRILL basic configuration
TRILL route selection control
TRILL security authentication configuration
CE series switch stack feature introduction
Stack technology overview
The procedure to realize stack
The common applications of stack
Stack system data forwarding and failure switchover
Stack system basic configuration
Hands-on Exercise Guide to stack feature
Establish the stack system on TOR switch
Join the stack system for TOR switch
Establish the stack system on CE12800 switch
CE series switch VS feature introduction
The background of VS
VS technology overview
VS technology principle
VS basic configuration
VS applications in network
nCenter virtual perception introduction
background of VM virtual migration
the technologies for VM virtual migration
the procedure of VM virtual migration realization
nCenter virtual perception implementation solution
OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance
CE series switch runtime maintenance
The contents of maintenance
The precautions of maintenance
The parts replacement of TOR switch
The parts replacement of CE12800 switch
CE series switch System software upgrade
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch
Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch
Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch
Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 212
ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 213
3.8 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs
3.8.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe IP route process
Describe the means of routing table
Differentiate the route load balance and route backup
Configure static route
Configure default route
Know what VLAN is
Know concepts about VLAN
Configure VLAN basic function
Know the mechanism and configuration of communication between VLANs
Describe what WLAN is
Describe the development process of WLAN technology
List typical application scenarios of WLAN technology
Describe the working frequency band of WLAN and the basic concepts of channel
Describe the rules of the working frequency band and channel in each country
List other technologies related to WLAN
Describe the basic concepts of 802.11
Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN
List Huawei WDS network mode
Describe mesh network mode
Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11
List the advantages of 802.11n
Training Content
OWL0A WLAN Technology Basics
Routing Protocol Foundation
IP route overview
WLAN Technology Basics
OWL0A 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 214
IP Static route
Static Route and Default Route Hands-on Exercise
Configure static route
Configure default route
VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration
VLAN overview
VLAN basic function
Concepts about VLAN
Mechanism of VLAN Communication
VLAN Basic Principle Hands-on Exercise
VLAN Basic Principle Configuration
WLAN Historical Overview
Introduction to wireless networks
What is WLAN
WLAN development
WLAN applications
WLAN Frequency Bands
Frequency and channel introduction
2.4GHz bands
5GHz bands
Other technology
WLAN Topologies Introduction
Basic elements of IEEE 802.11
WLAN topologies introduction
802.11 Protocol Introduction
802.11a/b/g protocol introduction
802.11n protocol introduction
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 215
3.8.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Describe Huawei AC basic performance
List Huawei wireless AP
Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
Install AC6605
Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types APs
List the note during installation
Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Use Huawei VRP basic command
Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Upgrade AC and AP
Training Content
OWL1A WLAN Installation and Basic Commissioning Training
Huawei WLAN Product Introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction
Huawei wireless controller introduction
Huawei WLAN network management system introduction
Huawei wireless Access Point introduction
A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction
Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction
AP Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
WLAN Installation and Basic Commissioning Training
OWL1A 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 216
Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
WLAN Foundation Experiment
Clear AC configuration, reboot
Configure switch VLAN
VRP and Initial Confection Introduction
Huawei VRP introduction
AC initial confection introduction
AC and AP upgrade introduction
The Basic Operation of the AC
Configure AC basic attribute
Configure AP go online
Configure WLAN service-set
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 217
3.8.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Describe Huawei AC basic performance
List Huawei wireless AP
Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
Install AC6605
Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types Aps
List the note during installation
Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP
Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
Outline the typical Application of WLAN
Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway
Describe the methods of AP management
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Use Huawei VRP basic command
Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Upgrade AC and AP
List the PoE components
Describe PoE budget
Configure the equipment interface of POE
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network
WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
OWL1B 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 218
Configure the basic attribute of AC
List the encryption suites of WLAN
List the authentication methods of WLAN
Configure security-profile
Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
Configure WLAN business by wizard
Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Training Content
OWL1B WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Huawei WLAN Product Introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction
Huawei wireless controller introduction
Huawei WLAN network management system introduction
Huawei wireless Access Point introduction
A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction
Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction
AP Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
WLAN Foundation Experiment
Clear AC configuration, reboot
Configure switch VLAN
AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction
AP Management
AP discovery AC
AP Access Control
VLAN Deployment
AC Application Scenarios
Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction
Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture
CAPWAP tunnel introduction
Typical WLAN networking application
AC deployment
VRP and Initial Confection Introduction
Huawei VRP introduction
AC initial confection introduction
AC and AP upgrade introduction
The Basic Operation of the AC
Configure AC basic attribute
Configure AP go online
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 219
Configure WLAN service-set
PoE Technology Introduction
PoE terminology
PoE Function
PoE configuration
AC Confection Flow Chart
WLAN Features Supported by the AC
WLAN configuration roadmap
WLAN Access Security
WLAN security overview
WLAN encryption suites
WLAN authentication methods
WLAN security configuration
eSight WLAN Management
Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN
WLAN operation
WLAN maintenance tasks
WLAN Access Security Configure
Configure WEP authentication
Configure WPA PSK authentication
Configure WPA dot1X authentication
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 220
3.8.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M
Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Describe Huawei AC basic performance
List Huawei wireless AP
Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture
Install AC6605
Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types Aps
List the note during installation
Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP
Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
Outline the typical Application of WLAN
Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway
Describe the methods of AP management
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Use Huawei VRP basic command
Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Upgrade AC and AP
List the PoE components
Describe PoE budget
Configure the equipment interface of POE
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC
WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training
OWL11 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 221
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network
Configure the basic attribute of AC
List the encryption suites of WLAN
List the authentication methods of WLAN
Configure security-profile
Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
Configure WLAN business by wizard
Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Describe the basic function of AC6605 LSW side
Configure the AC LSW's common functions
Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
List the method of WLAN reliability
Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Configure WLAN roaming
Describe the contents of user authority management
Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and White list
Configure user group authorization
Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment scenarios
Describe the Fresnel Zone
Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics
Describe Huawei outdoor AP
List antennas characteristic
Describe how to select antennas
Describe WDS basic concept
List WDS application scenarios
Describe WDS setup
Configure WDS
Configure 802.11n basic
Describe the principle of WLAN user load balance
Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the AC6605
Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
Describe eSight WLAN management advance features
Use eSight batch operate AP
Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner
Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
List the common fault of WLAN
Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 222
Training Content
WL11 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training
Huawei WLAN Product Introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction
Huawei wireless controller introduction
Huawei WLAN network management system introduction
Huawei wireless Access Point introduction
A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction
Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction
AP Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
WLAN Foundation Experiment
Clear AC configuration, reboot
Configure switch VLAN
AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction
AP Management
AP discovery AC
AP Access Control
VLAN Deployment
AC Application Scenarios
Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction
Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture
CAPWAP tunnel introduction
Typical WLAN networking application
AC deployment
VRP and Initial Confection Introduction
Huawei VRP introduction
AC initial configuration introduction
AC and AP upgrade introduction
The Basic Operation of the AC
Configure AC basic attribute
Configure AP go online
Configure WLAN service-set
PoE Technology Introduction
PoE terminology
PoE Function
PoE configuration
AC Confection Flow Chart
WLAN Features supported by the AC
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 223
WLAN configuration roadmap
WLAN Access Security
WLAN security overview
WLAN encryption suites
WLAN authentication methods
WLAN security configuration
eSight WLAN Management
Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN
WLAN operation
WLAN maintenance tasks
WLAN Access Security Configure
Configure WEP authentication
Configure WPA PSK authentication
Configure WPA dot1X authentication
The Basic Function of LSW
AC6605 logical architecture
The LSW features of the AC6605
The basic configuration of LSW
WLAN Reliability Introduction
WLAN reliability technology
WLAN reliability overview
The method of WLAN reliability
AP redundancy: automatically adjust the power
Link redundancy: link aggregation
Equipment redundancy: AC dual-link backup
Wireless Network Roaming Technology
Basic concept of roaming
Layer 2 and layer 3 roaming
Application scenarios and configuration of Huawei roaming
WLAN User Authority Management
User isolation and ACL
STA blacklist and white list
WLAN High-level Characteristic Configuration
Initialization configuration
Configure link aggregation and route
Configure user authority management
Configure AC dual-link backup
Configure WLAN roaming
Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment
WLAN deployment scenarios
Fresnel Zone introduction
Radio frequency mathematics
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 224
Outdoor AP and Antennas Introduction
Huawei outdoor AP introduction
Huawei antennas introduction
Antenna model selection
Huawei WDS Introduction
WDS Overview
WDS application scenarios
WDS Setup
WDS configuration example
802.11N and Load Balance
802.11N principle and configuration
WLAN load balance
Configure WDS
Configure WDS wireless bridge
WLAN QOS Configuration
WLAN QoS overview
WMM principle and configuration
Radio QoS Policy : WMM and EDCA
Traffic-profile: 802.1p mapping, User Priority and CAR
eSight WLAN Advance Management
eSight advance features
System log management and configuration
SNMP configuration
Use eSight batch operate AP
Wireless hot map analysis
Huawei WLAN Planner Introduction
The basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner
Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
WLAN Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting basic method introduction
Common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
Troubleshooting case
WLAN Maintenance and Optimization Experiment
Configure QOS optimization
Configure eSight
Use Huawei WLAN planner
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 225
3.8.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Describe Huawei AC basic performance
List Huawei wireless AP
Describe the ACU Concept and Function
Describe the ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700 Relationship
Describe the ACU Hardware Structure
Installing/Replacing ACU
Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types Aps
List the note during installation
Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP
Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel
Outline the typical Application of WLAN
Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway
Describe the methods of AP management
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode
Use Huawei VRP basic command
Configure Basic Attributes of AC
Upgrade AC and AP
List the PoE components
Describe PoE budget
Configure the equipment interface of POE
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC
ACU Operation and Maintenance Training
OWL21 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 226
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network
Configure the basic attribute of AC
List the encryption suites of WLAN
List the authentication methods of WLAN
Configure security-profile
Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight
Configure WLAN business by wizard
Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN
Describe the basic function of ACU LSW side
Configure the AC LSW's common functions
Describe the importance of WLAN reliability
List the method of WLAN reliability
Configure WLAN dual-link backup
Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Configure WLAN roaming
Describe the contents of user authority management
Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and White list
Configure user group authorization
Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment scenarios
Describe the Fresnel Zone
Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics
Describe Huawei outdoor AP
List antennas characteristic
Describe how to select antennas
Describe WDS basic concept
List WDS application scenarios
Describe WDS setup
Configure WDS
Configure 802.11n basic
Describe the principle of WLAN user load balance
Configure Huawei WLAN load balance
Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the ACU
Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile
Describe eSight WLAN management advance features
Use eSight batch operate AP
Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner
Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
List the common fault of WLAN
Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 227
Training Content
OWL21 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training
Huawei WLAN Product Introduction
Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction
Huawei wireless controller introduction
Huawei WLAN network management system introduction
Huawei wireless Access Point introduction
ACU Overview and Installing Introduction
ACU Overview
ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700 Relationship
ACU Hardware Structure Introduction
Installing/Replacing ACU Steps
AP Hardware and Installation Introduction
Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction
WLAN Foundation Experiment
Clear AC configuration, reboot
Configure switch VLAN
AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction
AP Management
AP discovery AC
AP Access Control
VLAN Deployment
AC Application Scenarios
Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction
Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture
CAPWAP tunnel introduction
Typical WLAN networking application
AC deployment
VRP and ACU Initial Confection Introduction
Huawei VRP introduction
ACU initial configuration introduction
ACU and AP upgrade introduction
The Basic Operation of the ACU
Configure ACU basic attribute
Configure AP go online
Configure WLAN service-set
PoE Technology Introduction
PoE terminology
PoE Function
PoE configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 228
ACU Confection Flow Chart
WLAN Features supported by the ACU
WLAN configuration roadmap
WLAN Access Security
WLAN security overview
WLAN encryption suites
WLAN authentication methods
WLAN security configuration
eSight WLAN Management
Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN
WLAN operation
WLAN maintenance tasks
WLAN Access Security Configure
Configure WEP authentication
Configure WPA PSK authentication
Configure WPA dot1X authentication
The Basic Function of Chassis Switch
Chassis Switch logical architecture
The Chassis Switch features of the ACU
The basic configuration of Chassis Switch
WLAN Reliability Introduction
WLAN reliability technology
WLAN reliability overview
The method of WLAN reliability
AP redundancy: automatically adjust the power
Link redundancy: link aggregation
Equipment redundancy: AC dual-link backup
Wireless Network Roaming Technology
Basic concept of roaming
Layer 2 and layer 3 roaming
Application scenarios and configuration of Huawei roaming
WLAN User Authority Management
User isolation and ACL
STA blacklist and white list
WLAN High-level Characteristic Configuration
Initialization configuration
Configure link aggregation and route
Configure user authority management
Configure AC dual-link backup
Configure WLAN roaming
Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment
WLAN deployment scenarios
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 229
Fresnel Zone introduction
Radio frequency mathematics
Outdoor AP and Antennas Introduction
Huawei outdoor AP introduction
Huawei antennas introduction
Antenna model selection
Huawei WDS Introduction
WDS Overview
WDS application scenarios
WDS Setup
WDS configuration example
802.11N and Load Balance
802.11N principle and configuration
WLAN load balance
Configure WDS
Configure WDS wireless bridge
WLAN QOS Configuration
WLAN QoS overview
WMM principle and configuration
Radio QoS Policy : WMM and EDCA
Traffic-profile: 802.1p mapping, User Priority and CAR
eSight WLAN Advance Management
eSight advance features
System log management and configuration
SNMP configuration
Use eSight batch operate AP
Wireless hot map analysis
Huawei WLAN Planner Introduction
The basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner
Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan
WLAN Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting basic method introduction
Common fault troubleshooting of WLAN
Troubleshooting case
WLAN Maintenance and Optimization Experiment
Configure QOS optimization
Configure eSight
Use Huawei WLAN planner
Duration
5 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 230
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 231
3.8.6 WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic principles of WLAN designing
Describe the basic process of WLAN designing
List Huawei WLAN devices
Differentiate the application features of different network modes
Use WLAN planner to design WLAN
Describe the application features of small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN
List the common used WLAN deployment modes of small and medium-sized enterprise
Plan the VLAN\route\channel of small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN
Describe the application features of large-scale enterprise WLAN
List the common used WLAN deployment modes of large-scale enterprise
Design WLAN HA feature
Design WLAN voice
Design WLAN expandability feature
Design WLAN advanced security feature
Design outdoor WLAN
Estimate the advantages and disadvantages of WLAN Network Design approach
List security threat types of WLAN
Describe the development process of encryption techniques
Describe the development of authentication techniques
Use protocol analyzer software
Describe authentication architecture of WPA
Describe AAA basic principle
Configure WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)
Configure Radius filter attribute and management authority between users
List extended security technology that Huawei WLAN supports
WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization
OWL0E 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise,
Case-study
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 232
Configure various security authentication techniques in AC
Describe scenarios of Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment
List Huawei outdoor AP models and their features
Describe dBi and antenna pattern
Choose the right outdoor antenna
Describe the basic concepts of WDS
List the common applications of WDS
Use WDS configuration command
List the basic protocols for wireless network management
Use NTP protocol and syslog protocol to configure time of AC
Describe the principle of SNMP protocol
Configure the SNMP parameters of AC
Use eSight to discover devices
Use eSight wizard to configure WLAN
Use eSight to detect WLAN devices
Use eSight to manage AP
Configure WLAN wireless service-set
Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis
Training Content
OWL0E WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization
WLAN Network Design Overview
Basic principle of WLAN Network Design
Basic designing process of WLAN network
WLAN products and selection
CAPWAP introduction and WLAN network deploying modes comparing
WLAN planner introduction
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise WLAN Network Design
Small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN network features
Common used WLAN network topologies of small and medium-sized enterprise
WLAN VLAN routing designing for small and medium-sized enterprise
WLAN Security designing for small and medium-sized enterprise
Large-scale Enterprise WLAN Network Design
Large-scale enterprise WLAN network features
WLAN HA designing: redundancy and load balance
WLAN voice Network Design: QoS and roaming
Extended WLAN feature designing: VLAN, SSID designing
Advanced WLAN security feature: customer authentication management
Outdoor WLAN Network Design: WDS network
WLAN Network Design Cases Analysis
Network deployment modes
VLAN and SSID designing
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 233
Security authentication
HA and QoS
WLAN Security Overview
WLAN security threat
Development process of encryption techniques
Development process of authentication techniques
Wireless WIPS, WIDS introduction
protocol analyzer software
WPA Enterprise Introduction and Configuration
Authentication architecture of WPA
AAA basic principle
Configuration cases of WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)
Radius filter attribute and user authentication management
Extended security, authentication techniques
SSID hiding
Wireless customer isolation strategy
PPPOE authentication
MAC authentication
Web portal authentication achievement
Hands-on Exercises Guide to WLAN security
Configure WLAN authentication techniques: open psk dot1x
Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment
WLAN outdoor deployment scenarios
Fresnel Zone Introduction
Radio Frequency Mathematics
Huawei WLAN Devices and Antenna Selection
Outdoor AP introduction
Outdoor AP installation introduction
Antenna introduction and selection
Huawei WDS Principle and Configuration
Basic concept of WDS and WDS application
AP planning of WDS
Simple bridge connection of WDS network
Complex bridge connection of WDS network
Hands-on Exercises Guide to WDS
Configure Huawei WDS wireless bridge connection feature
WLAN Network Management Overview
The necessity of WLAN network management
NTP overview
Syslog overview
SNMP overview
eSight Network Basic Management Feature
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 234
Devices discovery
Configure WLAN by Wizard
AP checking and customer checking
eSight Network Advanced Management Feature
Batch management of AP
Configure WLAN manually use eSight
WLAN positioning and hot map analysis
Troubleshooting
Hands-on Exercises Guide to eSight Manage WLAN
eSight basic configuration
eSight configure with wizard
eSight configuration manually
AP management and hot map analysis
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 235
3.9 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs
3.9.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of data communication
A general understanding of telecom network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
Describe ME60-X series products hardware structure
Describe ME60 product feature
Describe the VRP system structure
Describe the basic configuration and commands
Upgrade VRP system
Configure the VRP user logging authentication
Configure FTP service
Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP system
Describe basic BRAS technologies
Describe ME60 product routine maintenance
Training Content
ODA02 VRP System Operation
VRP Troubleshooting Basics
Fault classification and common disposal method
ME60 Product Routine Maintenance
ODB04 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 Product Introduction
ODB01 0.5d Lecture, LVC
VRP System Operation
ODA02 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 236
Common diagnose tools and command
Basic idea of fault diagnose and examples
VRP System Administration Practice Guide
VRP system administration practice
VRP Basic Configuration Practice Guide
VRP basic configuration practice
VRP Basic Configuration Manual
Building configuration environment
VRP configuration basis
ODB01 ME60 Product Introduction
ME60 Product Hardware Description Manual
ME60 hardware architecture
ME60 board types
ME60 board functions
ODB04 ME60 Product Routine Maintenance
ME60 Product Basic Maintenance Manual
Indicator Introduction
Introduction to Routine Maintenance Items
Commands for Routine Maintenance
ME60 Product Hardware Troubleshooting Manual
Analyze Slave MPU Cannot Be Registered
Analyze LPU or SFU Cannot Be Registered
Analyze Sub card Cannot Be Registered
Analyze Troubleshooting Case
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 237
3.9.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
At least one year of experience in the operation or maintenance of data communication
equipment
A general understanding of TCP/IP
ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB17 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 QoS Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB09 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 Multicast Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB08 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 L2TP Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB07 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 BRAS Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB06 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 Routing Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB05 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ME60 Product Introduction
ODB01 0.5d Lecture, LVC
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 238
A general understanding of routing basics
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe ME60 product hardware structure
Describe ME60-X series products hardware structure
Describe ME60 product feature
Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features
Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol features
Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features
Describe RADIUS protocol principle
Describe DHCP protocol principle
Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle
Describe ME60 PPP service features and realization
Describe ME60 IP service features and realization
Describe ME60 leased line service feature and realization
Describe ME60 BRAS service features troubleshooting
Configure ME60 PPP service features
Configure ME60 IP service features
Configure ME60 leased line service feature
Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization
Configure ME60 L2TP feature
Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization
Configure ME60 QoS feature
Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization
Configure ME60 RUI feature
Training Content
ODB01 ME60 Product Introduction
ME60 Product Hardware Description Manual
ME60 hardware architecture
ME60 board types
ME60 board functions
ODB05 ME60 Routing Features Operation and Troubleshooting
Configure OSPF on BRAS Product Manual
OSPF basic concept
OSPF neighbor and packets
OSPF network types
OSPF LSA
OSPF special area
OSPF single-area configuration
OSPF multi-area configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 239
OSPF route aggregation configuration
Area authentication configuration
Configure IS-IS on BRAS Product Manual
Overview of IS-IS routing protocol
Principle of IS-IS routing protocol
Comparing IS-IS and OSPF
IS-IS single-area configuration
IS-IS multi-area configuration
IS-IS layering configuration
IS-IS route import and convergence configuration
ODB06 ME60 BRAS Features Operation and Troubleshooting
Radius Protocol Principle Manual
RADIUS overview
RADIUS authentication principle
RADIUS accounting principle
DHCP Protocol Principle Manual
Fundamentals of DHCP
DHCP extensible features
DHCP configuration on BRAS
PPP and PPPoE Protocol Principle Manual
PPP principle and configuration
PPPoE principle and configuration
ME60 PPP Service Features and Realization Manual
Function of BRAS service related components
ME60 PPP service implementation
ME60 PPP service configuration
ME60 IP Service Features and Realization Manual
Function of BRAS service related components
ME60 IP service principle
ME60 IP service configuration
ME60 BRAS Service Features Troubleshooting Manual
PPP service troubleshooting
IP service troubleshooting
Troubleshooting case
ME60 Leased Line Service Feature and Realization Manual
Introduction to leased line service
Leased line service configuration on ME60
Layer 2 leased line Service configuration
Layer 3 leased line Service configuration
ODB07 ME60 L2TP Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ME60 L2TP Feature and Realization Manual
Principle of L2TP VPN
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 240
L2TP VPN configuration on ME60
LAC configuration
LNS configuration
ODB08 ME60 Multicast Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ME60 Multicast Feature and Realization Manual
IGMP principle and implementation
PIM SM principle and implementation
PIM SSM principle and implementation
PIM-SM basic configuration
RPT-to-SPT switchover configuration
ODB09 ME60 QoS Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ME60 QoS Feature and Realization Manual
ME60 IP QoS feature and realization
ME60 HQoS feature and realization
Traffic policing configuration
QoS scheduling configuration
Class-based QoS configuration
ODB17 ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features Operation and Troubleshooting
ME60 RUI Feature and Realization Manual
Overview of ME60 RUI feature
Principle of ME60 RUI feature
Configuration of ME60 RUI feature
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 241
3.9.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training
Training Path
Target Audience
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Attended ”ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training”
A good understanding of datacom network protocols
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and realization
Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature and realization
Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization
Describe ME60 IPTV solution features
Describe IPTV bear network multicast deployment solutions
Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature
Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature
Training Content
ODB18 ME60 IPTV Service Features
ME60 Multicast Feature and Realization
IGMP principle and implementation
PIM SM principle and implementation
PIM SSM principle and implementation
ME60 MQE Feature and Realization
FCC implementation principles and configuration
RET implementation principles and configuration
Video monitoring implementation principles and configuration
MQE deployment
ME60 BAS-Side Multicast Feature and Realization
BAS-Side multicast overview
Introduction to multicast QoS and CAC
BAS-Side multicast configuration example
BAS-Side multicast application scenario
ME60 IPTV Solution Overview
Background to IPTV
ME60 IPTV Service Features
ODB18 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 242
Typical IPTV components and their functions
Typical IPTV network Architecture
IPTV End-to-End service process
IPTV solution on the Huawei ME60
ME60 Multicast Hot-Backup Features and Realization
ME60 multicast hot-backup feature applications
ME60 multicast hot-backup feature principle
ME60 multicast hot-backup feature implementation
ME60 BAS-Side Multicast Feature Practice Guide
ME60 BAS-Side multicast configuration
ME60 Multicast Hot-Backup Features Practice Guide
ME60 multicast hot-backup configuration
Design and Deployment of Multicast Service on MAN
Multicast Design and Planning in MAN
Layer 2 Multicast Design and Planning in MAN
Duration
4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 243
3.9.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training
Training Path
Target Audience
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer or expert from technical supporting team
Prerequisites
Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training”
A good understanding of datacom network protocols
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 leased line features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 multicast features troubleshooting
Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting
Training Content
ODB20 ME60 Products Troubleshooting
ME60 Multicast Features Troubleshooting Manual
ME60 BAS-Side multicast features troubleshooting
ME60 BAS-Side multicast configuration
ME60 PPPoE Service Features Troubleshooting Manual
ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting
ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting practice
ME60 IPoE Service Features Troubleshooting Manual
ME60 DHCP and web authentication troubleshooting
ME60 DHCP and web authentication troubleshooting practice
ME60 Leased Line Service Features Troubleshooting Manual
ME60 Leased Line features troubleshooting
ME60 Leased Line features troubleshooting practice
ME60 QoS Features Troubleshooting Manual
ME60 QoS troubleshooting
ME60 QoS features troubleshooting practice
Duration
5 working days
ME60 Products Troubleshooting
ODB20 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 244
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 245
3.9.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training
Training Path
Target Audience
U2000 operator and maintainer
IP network routine monitor and maintainer
Prerequisites
Having the basic knowledge of Huawei ME60 product
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the architecture and main features of U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
List the main functions of U2000
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm
Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events
Manage ME60 by using U2000
Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000
Training Content
ODM06 iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration
iManager U2000 PPPoE Service Deployment
Configure PPPoEoVLAN service on ME60 by using U2000
ONU01 U2000 System Introduction
iManager U2000 System Introduction
The architecture and main features of U2000
U2000 Alarm and Performance Management
ONU02 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on Exercise
U2000 System Introduction
ONU01 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration
iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration
ODM06 1d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 246
The directory structure of U2000
The main functions of U2000
ONU02 U2000 Alarm and Performance Management
iManager U2000 Fault Management
Overview of the fault management
Monitoring of the fault alarm
Processing of the fault alarm
Notification of the fault alarm
Dumping of the fault and event
iManager U2000 Performance Management
Overview of the performance management
Monitoring equipment performance
Monitoring VPN performance
Dumping performance data
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 247
3.10 PTN Products Training Programs
3.10.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
PTN series installation and commissioning engineer
Prerequisites
Having an overview of PTN products applications
Having an overview of telecommunications
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure
Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure
Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the precautions
Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the precautions
Training Content
ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description
PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description
Networking applications of the PTN products
System structure of the PTN products
Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products
System protection schemes of the PTN products
PTN 950&910 Hardware Description
PTN 950&910 application
PTN 950&910 Chassis
PTN 950&910 boards
ODP05 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning
PTN 3900&1900 Installation Guide
Cabinet installation
PTN 3900 sub-rack installation
PTN Products Installation and Commissioning
ODP05 1d Lecture, Demonstration
PTN Products Hardware Description
ODP03 1d Lecture, Demonstration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 248
PTN 1900 sub-rack installation
PTN 950&910 Installation Guide
Precautions of installation
PTN 950 installation
PTN 910 installation
Checking process after installation
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 249
3.10.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Having an overview of PTN products applications
Having an overview of telecommunications
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure
Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure
Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site maintenance
Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance
Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting
Describe 950&910 troubleshooting
Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
Describe the tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC
Training Content
ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description
PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description
Networking applications of the PTN products
System structure of the PTN products
Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products
System protection schemes of the PTN products
PTN 950&910 Hardware Description
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC
ODP07 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
PTN Products Field Maintenance
ODP06 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
PTN Products Hardware Description
ODP03 1d Lecture, Demo
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 250
PTN 950&910 application
PTN 950&910 Chassis
PTN 950&910 boards
ODP06 PTN Products Field Maintenance
PTN 3900&1900 On-Site Maintenance
Routine maintenance in NMS Center
On-site routine maintenance
Routine maintenance of Spare Parts
PTN 950&910&912 On-site Maintenance
Understand the meanings of PTN 950&910&912 indicators
ODP07 PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC
PTN Products Routine Maintenance
Tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 251
3.10.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
ODP13 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
PTN Products Service Configuration
ODP11 2d Hands-on exercise, Demo
PTN Products Basic Configuration
ODP10 1d Hands-on exercise, Demo
PTN Products Public Features
ODP09 2d Lecture, Demo
PTN Products Public Principle
ODP08 2d Lecture
PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC
ODP07 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
PTN Products Features Description
ODP04 1d Lecture
PTN Products Hardware Description
ODP03 1d Lecture, Demo
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 252
Prerequisites
Having an overview of PTN products applications
Having an overview of telecommunications
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe TCP&IP basic concepts
Describe Ethernet basic principle
Describe basic IP routing protocol works
Describe MPLS basic concepts
Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure
Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure
Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature
Describe PTN 950&910 software feature
Describe PTN products PWE3 technology
Describe PTN products control plane
Describe PTN products QoS technology
Describe PTN products protection technology
Describe PTN products packet clock technology
Configure PTN products basic parameters
Configure PTN products interfaces
Configure PTN products control plane
Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel
Configure PTN products CES service
Configure PTN products ATM service
Configure PTN products E-Line service
Configure PTN products E-LAN service
Configure PTN products E-AGGR service
Describe PTN Products routine maintenance
Describe the tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting process
Training Content
ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description
PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description
Networking applications of the PTN products
System structure of the PTN products
Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products
System protection schemes of the PTN products
PTN 950&910 Hardware Description
PTN 950&910 application
PTN 950&910 Chassis
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 253
PTN 950&910 boards
ODP04 PTN Products Features Description
PTN 3900&1900 Feature Description
PTN 3900&1900 applications
PTN 3900&1900 protection features
PTN 3900&1900 QoS features
PTN 3900&1900 OAM features
PTN 3900&1900 synchronization features
PTN 3900&1900 In-band DCN features
PTN 950&910 Feature Description
Service type of PTN 950&910
Microwave feature of PTN 950&910
PTN 950&910 protection, QoS, OAM, Synchronization, xDSL features etc.
ODP07 PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC
PTN Products Routine Maintenance
Tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC.
ODP08 PTN Products Public Principle
TCP-IP Fundamental
TCP/IP and OSI Reference Model
Function of layers of TCP/IP
Describe classification of IP addresses
Basic principle of IP routing
Ethernet Technology
Ethernet physical layer
Ethernet data link layer
VLAN technology and its applications
MSTP technology and its applications
IP Routing Basic
What is router and route
Classification of routing protocols
How IS-IS routing protocol works
MPLS Basic
MPLS concepts
How LSP is setup and how MPLS forward packets
Common ways of MPLS troubleshooting
MPLS OAM concepts and applications
ODP09 PTN Products Public Features
PTN PWE3 Technology
Basic concepts of PWE3
How TDM service is emulated by PWE3
How ATM service is emulated by PWE3
How Ethernet service is emulated by PWE3
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 254
Typical applications of different service type
PTN Control Plane Introduction
Four elements of MPLS TE
How IS-IS TE distribute the TE information
How the TE path is calculated
How RSVP-TE works
Basic principle of LDP
PTN QoS Technology
QoS model
QoS basic concept
ATM QoS
Concepts of the HQoS
QoS typical application in PTN network
PTN Protection Technology
MPLS APS and MPLS FRR protection
LMSP protection
Ethernet LAG protection
E1-link protection
PTN Packet Clock Technology
Necessity of synchronization on IP network
Principle of ACR/TOP
Principle of synchronization Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 principle
ODP10 PTN Products Basic Configuration
PTN Products Basic Configuration
Starting U2000
Creating network using U2000
PTN Products Interface Configuration
Configuration flow of SDH interface
SDH interface configuration using T2000
Parameters of SDH interface
PTN Control Plane Configuration
Basic configuration of Control plane
IS-IS configuration process
LDP configuration process
RSVP configuration process
Static route configuration process
PTN Tunnel Configuration
Dynamic MPLS Tunnel Configuration
Static MPLS Tunnel Configuration
PTN Basic Configuration Practice
U2000 basic operation through practice
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 255
Interface configuration
Tunnel configuration
ODP11 PTN Products Service Configuration
PTN PWE3 Service Configuration
Using trail function to configure CES service
CES service configuration process based on per-NE basis
E-Line service configuration
E-Line service related parameters
Using trail function to configure ATM service
ATM service configuration process based on per-NE basis
PTN E-LAN Service Configuration
E-LAN service configuration
E-LAN service related parameters
ODP13 PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
PTN Products Troubleshooting Basic
Fault handing flow
Familiar with methods of analyzing and locating faults
Regular operations for troubleshooting
Software package loading & diffusion
Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 256
3.10.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Configure PTN products QoS features
Configure PTN products protection
Deploy PTN products integrated services
Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting process
Describe PTN products alarm and performance analysis
Describe PTN products common troubleshooting sase
Locate and eliminate PTN products faults
Training Content
ODP12 PTN Products Advanced Configuration
PTN Products Protection Configuration
MPLS APS protection configuring process
MPLS FRR protection configuring process
Ethernet LAG configuring process
PTN Products QoS Configuration
Creating a DiffServ Domain
Creating the Service WRED Policy
Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy
PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting
ODP14 2.5d Lecture, Case-study
PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
ODP13 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
PTN Products Advanced Configuration
ODP12 2d Hands-on exercise, Demo
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 257
Creating the Port Policy
Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy
Creating the V-UNI Egress Policy
Creating the PW Policy
Creating the QinQ Policy
Configuring the ATM CoS Mapping
Creating the ATM Policy
PTN Products Integrated Service Deployment
End-to-end CES service configuration
End-to-end ATM service configuration
End-to-end E-Line service configuration
End-to-end E-LAN service configuration
End-to-end E-Aggr service configuration
ODP13 PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting
PTN Products Troubleshooting Basic
Fault handing flow
Familiar with methods of analyzing and locating faults
Regular operations for troubleshooting
Software package loading & diffusion
ODP14 PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting
PTN Products Alarm and Performance Analysis
PTN Products Alarm and Performance Analysis
PTN Products Troubleshooting Case Study
DCN Communication Faults
Operation Fails
Interconnection Faults
Service Faults
PTN Products Troubleshooting Practice Guide
Network Topology and Parameter Settings
Troubleshooting of Faults of the NMS and DCN
Troubleshooting of Control Plane Faults
Tunnel Fault Troubleshooting
CES Service Troubleshooting
Ethernet Service Troubleshooting
ATM Service Troubleshooting
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 258
3.10.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Target Audience
PTN series network planning and design engineer
Prerequisites
Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance training
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the PTN network planning process
Collect the network requirements information
Plan the PTN network layers
Plan the PTN network services
Plan the PTN network management and DCN
Plan the equipment types according to the network requirement
Plan the PTN equipment boards
Plan the PTN network protections
Plan the PTN network synchronization
Plan the PTN network QoS
Design the PTN network layers
Design the PTN network slots allocation
Design the PTN equipment parameters
Design the MPLS tunnel parameters
Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services parameters
Training Content
ODP15 PTN Network Planning and Design
PTN Network Planning and Design Overview
PTN Network Planning and Design Overview
PTN Network Planning -- Products Specifications
Products Specifications
PTN Network Planning -- Requirements Collection
Requirements Collection
PTN Network Planning -- Topology and Hardware Planning
Topology and Hardware Planning
PTN Network Planning -- NM and DCN Planning
PTN Network Planning and Design
ODP15 3d Lecture, Case-study
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 259
NM and DCN Planning
PTN Network Planning -- NE Parameters Planning
NE Parameters Planning
PTN Network Planning -- Service Bandwidth Analysis
Service Bandwidth Analysis
PTN Network Planning -- Service and Tunnel Planning
Service and Tunnel Planning
PTN Network Planning -- QoS Planning
QoS Planning
PTN Network Planning -- Protection Planning
Protection Planning
PTN Network Planning -- OAM Planning
OAM Planning
PTN Network Planning -- Synchronization Planning
Synchronization Planning
PTN Network Planning -- Case Research
Case Research
PTN Network Design
PTN Network Design Overview
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 4, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 260
3.11 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training
Programs
3.11.1 eSight Enterprise NM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of network management
Describe the network management functions
Describe the network management component
Describe the enterprise network overview
Describe the basic functions of eSight
Describe the networking mode of eSight system
Describe eSight related indicators Describe topology management
Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Describe about physical resource management functions
Use link resource management functions
Use electronic label management features
Use about NE Explorer Describe
Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Describes the remote alarm notification procedure
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration files
Describe common operations for managing NE configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration files
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up parameters
eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and Maintenance
1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1A
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 261
Training Content
ONM1A eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and Maintenance
Basic Principles of IP Network Management
The basic concepts of network management
Network management functions
Network management component
eSight Product Introduction
Enterprise network overview
The basic functions of eSight
The networking mode of eSight system
The related indicators of eSight
eSight Network Resource Management
Topology Management
Accessing a Resource
Creating a Subnet
Creating an NE
Physical Resource Management
Link Management
Electronic Labels Management
NE Explorer
eSight Network Fault Management
Fault Management
Monitoring Alarms
Alarm Analysis
Setting Alarm Masking
Setting Remote Alarm Notifications
eSight Network Performance Management
Basic Concepts of Performance Management
Performance Monitoring Process
Browsing Performance Monitoring Data
eSight Configuration File Management
Backing Up NE Configuration Files
Managing NE Configuration Files
Restoring NE Configuration Files
Setting FTP and Backing Up Parameters
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 262
3.11.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the
Basic O&M Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of network management
Describe the network management functions
Describe the network management component
Describe the enterprise network overview
Describe the basic functions of eSight
Describe the networking mode of eSight system
Describe eSight related indicators
Describe the installation profile
Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps
Master eSight license function and application
Describe the user authority control and managed domain management of eSight
Describe topology management
Describe the steps of accessing a resource
Describe about physical resource management functions
Use link resource management functions
Use electronic label management features
Use about NE Explorer
Describes the monitoring network alarm steps
Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features
Describes the setting alarm mask steps
Describes the remote alarm notification procedure
Describes the basic concepts of performance management
Describes the performance monitoring process
eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance
ONM11 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 263
Describes the ways to browsing performance monitoring data
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration files
Describe common operations for managing NE configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration files
Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up parameters
Describe an overview of the functions provided by the smart configuration tool
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by template
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by plan sheet
Describe the functions of Deployment record management
Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
Describe querying logs
Describe Lower-Layer NMS
Describe licenses management
Describe backing up and restoring the database
Describe NE packages management
Training Content
ONM11 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training
Basic Principles of IP Network Management
The basic concepts of network management
Network management functions
Network management component
eSight Product Introduction
Enterprise network overview
The basic functions of eSight
The networking mode of eSight system
The related indicators of eSight
eSight Software Installation Guide
Installation profile
Installation process step
Uninstall eSight system
eSight Network Security Management
Introduction to security Management
Role management
User access control
User-Defined managed domain
Security policy settings
Security monitoring
eSight Network Resource Management
Topology Management
Accessing a Resource
Creating a Subnet
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 264
Creating an NE
Physical Resource Management
Link Management
Electronic Labels Management
NE Explorer
eSight Network Fault Management
Fault Management
Monitoring Alarms
Alarm Analysis
Setting Alarm Masking
Setting Remote Alarm Notifications
eSight Network Performance Management
Basic Concepts of Performance Management
Performance Monitoring Process
Browsing Performance Monitoring Data
eSight Configuration File Management
Backing Up NE Configuration Files
Managing NE Configuration Files
Restoring NE Configuration Files
Setting FTP and Backing Up Parameters
Smart Configuration Tool
Overall Functions Overview
Deploy by template
Deploy by Plan Sheet
Deploy Record Management
eSight System Management
Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump
Querying logs
Lower-Layer NMS
Managing Licenses
Backing Up and Restoring the Database
Managing NE Packages
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 265
3.11.3 eSight WLAN Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN
Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN management
Describe maintenance routine task of eSight WLAN
Use eSight WLAN serve management to manage WLAN equipment
Training Content
NM1B eSight WLAN Management
eSight WLAN Management
eSight WLAN management introduction
eSight WLAN management operation task
eSight WLAN Management maintenance task
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight WLAN Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1B
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 266
3.11.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN
Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN Automatic Discovery of eSight
Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring Services of eSight
Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN
Training Content
ONM1C eSight BGP/MPLS VPN Management
eSight BGP/MPLS VPN Management
eSight BGP/MPLS VPN management introduction
Automatic Discovery
Monitoring Services
Diagnosing Service Faults
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight MPLS VPN Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1C
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 267
3.11.5 eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS tunnels
Configure automatic discovery of MPLS tunnels
Monitor functions of MPLS tunnels
Training Content
ONM1J eSight MPLS tunnel Management
eSight MPLS tunnel Management
Basic Concepts and Functions
Management Setting
Automatic Tunnel Discovery
Tunnel Monitoring
Monitoring Scenario
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1J
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 268
3.11.6 eSight SLA Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the functions and basic concepts of SLA of eSight
Use the service management of SLA of eSight
Use the task management of SLA of eSight
Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight
Use the report of SLA of eSight
Training Content
ONM1D eSight SLA Management
eSight eSight SLA Management
SLA Functions and Basic Concepts
Managing SLA services
Managing SLA tasks
SLA Quick Diagnosis
SLA Report
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight SLA Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1D
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 269
3.11.7 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN
Describe eSight IPSec VPN management features
Use eSight IPSec VPN management features
Training Content
ONM1E eSight IPSec VPN Management
eSight IPSec VPN Management
IPSec VPN Application
IPSec VPN Management Operations
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight IPSec VPN Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1E
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 270
3.11.8 eSight Smart Report Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic functions of eSight Report
Use eSight Report features
Training Content
ONM1F eSight Report Management
eSight Report Management
Report management introduction
Creating a report
Report system configuration
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight Smart Report Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1F
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 271
3.11.9 eSight NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of NTA management
Use eSight NTA management features
Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA management
Training Content
ONM1G eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management
eSight NTA Management
What users are seeking
NTA management features
Use eSight NTA management
Application scenarios
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1G
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 272
3.11.10 eSight Access Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe eSight access service management features
Use eSight access service management features
Describe the application scenarios of eSight access service management
Training Content
ONM1H eSight Access Management
eSight Access Management
What users are seeking
Access management features
Use eSight access management
Application scenarios
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight Access Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1H
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 273
3.11.11 eSight Data Center Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the needs of data center service management
Use eSight data center service management features
Describe the application scenarios of eSight data center service management
Training Content
ONM1I eSight Data Center Management
eSight Data Center Management
What users are seeking
Data center management features
Use eSight data center management
Application scenarios
Duration
0.5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
eSight Data Center Management
0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1I
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 274
3.11.12 eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Installers and Commissioning Staff
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the background of VSM system
Describe VSM system function
Describe VSM system structure
Describe Typical Scenarios of VSM System Application
Describe VSM System Performance index
Understand VSM Installation flow and Preparations
Be familiar with VSM Installation Process
Be familiar with VSM system Basic Operation
Understand Functional modules of VSM
Understand VSM System Technology and Application
Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of VSM
Training Content
OSS31 VSM Product Overview
Overview of the VSM
VSM Product Overview
OSS31 0.5d Lecture,
VSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration
OSS32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
VSM Product Operation and Maintenance
OSS33 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 275
Background of VSM system
VSM Product feature
VSM System composition
VSM System Construction
TMN standard frame
VSM Software Architecture
VSM Networking Schemes
VSM System Function Feature
Centralized NE Management
Centralized Security Policy Management
Perfect Security Service Analysis
All-around Security Audit
Centralized NE Management
Fault Management
Performance Management
Northbound Interface Management
VSM Application Scenarios and Networking Schemes
VSM Application scene
VSM Networking Schemes
VSM Product Feature and Security
VSM Product Feature
VSM Product Security
OSS32 VSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration
VSM Installation Flow
Centralized Deployment
Distributed Deployment
VSM Installation Planning
Background Information
License Planning
Deployment Planning
NTP Service Planning
Port List
Security Planning
VSM Installation
Dividing and Mounting Disk Partitions
Applying For a License
Installing the Database for the Server
Installing the VSM Server
Installing a Log Collector
Installing the Server Monitor
VSM Basic Operation
Starting and Stopping VSM Server
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 276
Uninstalling VSM Server
Uninstalling SQL Server Database
Uninstalling Server Monitor
OSS33 VSM Product Operation and Maintenance
Introduce VSM foundation component
NE concept
Introduce VSM foundation component
Resource Management
Discovering NEs
Synchronizing NEs
Monitoring Performance
Topology Management
Introduction to Topology Management
Configuration Process
Creating Topology Objects
Adjusting the Topology View
Alarm Management
Introduction to Alarm Management
Setting Trap Parameters on an NE
Configuring the Sound Notification
Managing Alarms
Masking the Alarms
Dumping the Alarms
Configuration Example
Security Policy Configuration
Security Policy Overview
Configuration Flow
Configuring the Security Policy
Configuring the Common Object
User Management
User Overview
Managing Users
Synchronizing Users
System Management
Service Analysis
Overview
Initialization Configuration
Configuring NEs
Traffic Analysis
Overview
Analyzing the Interface Traffic
Analyzing the Basic Traffic
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 277
Analyzing the Application Traffic
Online Behavior Analysis
Basic Traffic Analysis
Application Analysis
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Principle
Troubleshooting Flow
Collection breakdown data
Typical Troubleshooting case
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 278
3.11.13 eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Installers and Commissioning Staff
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the background of eLog system
Describe eLog system function
Describe eLog system structure
Describe Typical Scenarios of eLog System Application
Describe eLog System Performance
Understand eLog Installation flow and Preparations
Be familiar with eLog Installation Process
Be familiar with eLog system Basic Operation
Understand Functional modules of eLog
Understand eLog System Technology and Application
Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of eLog
Training Content
OSS41 eLog Product Overview
Overview of the eLog
eLog Product Overview
OSS41 0.5d Lecture,
eLog Product Basic Installation and Configuration
OSS42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
eLog Product Operation and Maintenance
OSS43 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 279
Log Management Status
eLog Product Positioning
eLog system function
Typical Scenarios of eLog System Application
Application Scenario of Centralized NE Management
Application Scenarios of Service Analysis
eLog Networking Schemes
Centralized Deployment Networking
Distributed Deployment Networking
Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Manageable Devices
Operation and Maintenance Features
Device Security
OSS42 ELog Product Basic Installation and Configuration
eLog Installation Planning
Deployment Planning
License Planning
NTP Service Planning
Port List
Security Planning
Installation Flow
Installation Flow in Centralized Deployment
Installation Flow in Distributed Deployment
Preparations
Checking Environment Requirements
Collecting Installation Information
Checking Hardware Connections
Checking the Integrity of the Software Package
eLog Installation
Installing the Operating System
Dividing and Mounting Disk Partitions
Installing the Database for the server
Installing the eLog Server
Installing a Log Collector
Installing the Server Monitor
eLog Basic Operation
Start eLog service
Uninstalling the eLog
Uninstalling the Server Monitor
OSS43 ELog Product Operation and Maintenance
eLog system server
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 280
NEs management
Audit event management
Alarm management
Report forms management
User management
System management
Performance management
eLog Log Collector
Log collection
Log Classification
Log Filtration
Log Combination
Log Alarm and Traffic Analysis
eLog Probe
Overview
Configuration Example
eLog Console management
Console function
Start Console
Troubleshooting
Common Troubleshooting Case
Duration
2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 281
3.12 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs
3.12.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe enterprise network design principles
Describe enterprise network design basic process
Analyze general enterprise requirements for network design
Describe best practices of enterprise network design
Describe Huawei enterprise network products
Design general enterprise network
Training Content
ORS91 Enterprise Network Design Outlines
Enterprise Network Design Outlines
Enterprise network design outlines
Best practices of enterprise network design
Choosing appropriate products
Enterprise network design case study
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Enterprise Network Design Outlines
1d Lecture, Case-study ORS91
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 282
3.12.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
A general experience in network design
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe concepts of campus network
Describe Huawei OneNet campus network solution
List common technologies in campus network
Describe Huawei OneNet campus business solution
Choose appropriate products for campus network
Training Content
ORS92 Designing Enterprise Campus Network
Designing Enterprise Campus Network
Campus network overview
Campus network solution
Campus business solution
Huawei campus network products
Campus network design cases
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Designing Enterprise Campus Network
1d Lecture, Case-study ORS92
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 283
3.12.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Analyze of the general needs of enterprise network construction
Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN
Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS L3VPN architecture
Select the appropriate technology and solutions for enterprise networking
Choose the appropriate product for enterprise networking
Training Content
ORS93 Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise
Enterprise business analysis
MPLS L3VPN technology review
MPLS L3VPN detailed design
Choosing the appropriate products for networking
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise
1d Lecture, Case-study ORS93
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 284
3.12.4 Data Center Network Design Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Planners and Designers
Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS/VPN
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Outline Data Center Network Overview
Outline Trend of Data Center Network
Outline Data Center Network Solution
List Principles of Data Center Network Design
Design Data Center Network Architecture
Design Data Center Network Areas
Design Data Center Network Panels
Design Data Center Network Services
Design Data Center Network Interconnection
Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Describe Data Center WAN Optimization Solution
Describe Data Center NetStream Solution
List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center Network
Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solution
List Huawei CloudEngine Products
Training Content
ORS94 Designing Data Center Network
Data Center Network Challenges Trend and Solution
Data Center Network Overview
Data Center Network Trends
Data Center Network Solution
Data Center Network Design
Data Center Architecture
Designing Data Center Network
2d Lecture ORS94
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 285
Data Center Network Areas
Data Center Network Panels
Data Center Network Service Planning
Data Center Network Interconnection
Data Center Network Application Optimization Solution
Data Center Load-balancing Solution
Data Center WAN Optimization Solution
Data Center NetStream Solution
Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solutions
Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center Network
Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solution
Huawei CloudEngine Products Introduction
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
3.13 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs
3.13.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.
Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.
Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration
Firewall Elementary Technology
FW01 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 286
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the application of NAT.
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.
Content
FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall Working Modes
Firewall Security Zones
Firewall Functions
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Packet Filtering Technology
ACL Overview
Interface-based Packet Filtering
Interzone Packet Filtering
Application Analysis of Packet Filtering
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 287
3.14 Security Technology Topic Training Programs
3.14.1 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
Understand key VPN technologies.
Understand the classification and application of VPN.
Understand the principles of L2TP.
Understand the principles of the IPSec technology.
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.
Understand Advanced features and configuration of IPSec VPN.
Understand Advanced features and configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN applications.
Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.
Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.
Content
FW03 Basic VPN Technology
VPN Overview
VPN Introduction
VPN technologies
VPN classification
L2TP VPN
VPDN Overview
L2TP VPN Technology
Basic VPN Technology
FW03 1.5d
Firewall VPN Technical Topic
FW0B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 288
Client-Initialized L2TP
NAS-Initialized L2TP
IPSec VPN
IPSec VPN Overview
IPSec VPN Architecture
AH Technology
ESP Technology
IKE Technology
IPSec VPN Application Scenarios
SSL VPN
SSL VPN Overview
SSL VPN Technology
SSL VPN Security Policy
SSL VPN Application Scenario
FW0B Firewall VPN Technical Topic
Advanced VPN Applications of Firewalls
Review of IPSec VPN Fundamentals.
Scenarios of Advanced IPSec VPN Application.
Examples for Configuring Advanced IPSec VPN Application.
Application of L2TP over IPSec VPN.
Scenarios of L2TP + IPSEC VPN Application
Examples for Configuring L2TP over IPSec VPN Application
Comprehensive VPN Applications.
Troubleshooting for VPN
L2TP VPN troubleshooting configuration.
L2TP VPN troubleshooting ideas and steps.
L2TP VPN troubleshooting case.
IPSEC VPN configuration note.
IPSEC VPN troubleshooting configuration.
IPSEC VPN troubleshooting ideas and steps.
IPSEC VPN troubleshooting case.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 289
3.14.2 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of UTM
Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention technology.
Understand major antivirus technologies for gateways
Understand the key technology of Web filtering.
Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
Understand the main DPI technology.
Troubleshooting of IPS
Troubleshooting of AV
Troubleshooting of URL filtering
Troubleshooting of RBL filtering
Troubleshooting of Internet behavior management.
Content
FW0C Firewall UTM Technical Topic
UTM Overview
Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology
Information System Status Quo.
Intrusion Detection Overview.
Intrusion Prevention Overview.
Intrusion Detection Technology.
Intrusion Detection Model.
Intrusion Prevention Mechanism.
Product Overview.
NIP Functions.
Installing and Configuring the NIP.
IPS Function.
IPS Typical Networking.
Firewall UTM Technical Topic
FW0C 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 290
IPS Configuration.
Antivirus Technologies for Gateways
Basic Knowledge of Viruses.
Virus Signatures and Common Tools for Detecting Viruses.
Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.
Application of Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.
WEB Filtering Technologies
Overview of Web Filtering.
Concepts in URL Filtering.
URL Categorization and Filtering Techniques.
Overall Process Flow.
Malicious Web Page Detection Technologies.
Web Filtering Application Scenario.
Web Filtering in UTM.
Spam Filtering Technologies
Anti-Spam Overview.
Anti-Spam Technologies.
Application of Anti-Spam Technologies.
DPI Technologies
DPI technologies Background
DPI Overview
DPI Applications
Troubleshooting for UTM Features
Precautions for IPS Configuration.
IPS Detection Failure.
Unavailable IPS Services.
Precautions for AV Configuration.
AV Detection Failure.
Unavailable AV Services.
Precautions for URL Filtering Configuration.
URL Filtering Failure.
URL Filtering Case.
Precautions for RBL Filtering Configuration.
RBL Filtering Failure.
RBL Filtering Case.
DPI Fault Troubleshooting
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 291
3.14.3 Firewall Advanced Technology Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Advanced Firewall Security Features
Understand Firewall Reliability Technology
Understand Virtual Firewall Technology
Understand Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall
Troubleshooting of attack defense.
Troubleshooting of IP-Car.
Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration
Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Typical Networking.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Content
FW0D Advanced Firewall Security Features
Advanced Firewall Security Features
Packet Fragmentation.
IP CAR.
DHCP Snooping.
Firewall Reliability
IP-Link technology.
Eth-Trunk technology.
Link-Group technology.
Virtual Firewall Technology
Virtual Firewall Overview.
Advanced Firewall Security Features
FW0D 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology
FW0A 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 292
Virtual Firewall Technology Principles.
Virtual Firewall Application Analysis.
Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall
Overview of Network Attacks.
Attack Defense Technologies.
Traffic Attack and Defense Technologies.
Scanning and Sniffing Attackand Defense Technologies.
Malformed-Packet Attacks and Defense Technologies.
Special-Packet Attacks and Defense Technologies.
Attack Defense Technologies Defense on Firewalls
Troubleshooting for Firewall Advanced Features
Attack Defense troubleshooting.
IP-Car troubleshooting.
FW0A Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology
Firewall Dual-system hot backup principle
Architecture of Dual-System Hot Backup
VRRP Basic Principle
VGMP Basic Principle
HRP Basic Principle
Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration
Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Typical Networking
Routing Mode + Switch
Routing Mode + Router
Routing Mode + Router/Switch
Troubleshooting of HA technology
Dual-System Hot Backup troubleshooting.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 293
3.15 Firewall Training Programs
3.15.1 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of USG2000/5000 firewall
Content
FW11 USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview
USG2000/5000 Products Overview
Product Introduction
Hardware Architecture
Function and Feature
Application Scenario
FW12 USG2000/5000 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Installation and Configuration of Firewall
Installation Hardware
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product Overview
FW11 0.5d Lecture,
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration
FW12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 294
Initial Connection Configuration Introduction
Basic Configuration Introduction
Device Upgrade Guide
Configuration WEB Guide
Deploy Configuration
Function and Configuration
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 295
3.15.2 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.
Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.
Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the application of NAT
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls
Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product Overview
FW11 0.5d Lecture,
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration
FW12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Operation and Maintenance
FW13 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Basic Firewall Technology
Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 296
Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the upgrade method of USG2000/5000 firewall
Understand the routine maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the typical network configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the networking and configuration of USG2000/5000/UTM firewall
Describe the troubleshooting method of USG2000/5000 firewall
Content
FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall Working Modes
Firewall Security Zones
Firewall Functions
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Packet Filtering Technology
ACL Overview
Interface-based Packet Filtering
Interzone Packet Filtering
Application Analysis of Packet Filtering
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
FW11 USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview
USG2000/5000 Products Overview
Product Introduction
Hardware Architecture
Function and Feature
Application Scenario
FW12 USG2000/5000 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Installation and Configuration of Firewall
Installation Hardware
Initial Connection Configuration Introduction
Basic Configuration Introduction
Device Upgrade Guide
Configuration WEB Guide
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 297
Deploy Configuration
Function and Configuration
FW13 USG2000/5000 Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Service Feature and Configuration of USG2000/5000 Firewall
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall NAT
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall L2TP
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall GRE
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall IPSec
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall SSL
USG2000/5000/UTM Features
Introduction to UTM feature
Networking and Configuration
Maintenance and Troubleshooting of USG2000/5000 Firewall
Routine Maintenance
Fault Analysis and solve
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 298
3.15.3 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning
Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600 firewall
Describe the function and features of USG6600 firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG6600 firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG6600 firewall
Describe the basic configuration of USG6600 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of USG6600 firewall
Content
FW19 USG6600 Series Product Overview
USG6600 Products Overview
Product Introduction
Hardware Architecture
Function and Feature
Application Scenario
FW20 USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Installation and Configuration of Firewall
Installation Hardware
Initial Connection Configuration Introduction
Basic Configuration Introduction
Device Upgrade Guide
USG6600 Series Product Overview
FW19 0.5d Lecture
USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW20 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 299
Configuration WEB Guide
Deploy Configuration
Function and Configuration Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 300
3.15.4 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance
Training(include USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and
Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.
Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.
Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the application of NAT
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls
Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600 firewall
Describe the function and features of USG6600 firewall
USG6600 Series Product Overview
FW19 0.5d Lecture
USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW20 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
USG6600 Series Product Operation and Maintenance
FW21 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Firewall Elementary Technology
Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 301
Describe the application scenario of USG6600 firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG6600 firewall
Describe the basic configuration of USG6600 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of USG6600 firewall
Describe the upgrade method of USG6600 firewall
Understand the routine maintenance of USG6600 firewall
Describe the typical network configuration of USG6600 firewall
Describe the networking and configuration of USG6600 firewall
Describe the troubleshooting method of USG6600 firewall
Content
FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall Working Modes
Firewall Security Zones
Firewall Functions
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Packet Filtering Technology
ACL Overview
Interface-based Packet Filtering
Interzone Packet Filtering
Application Analysis of Packet Filtering
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
FW19 USG6600 Series Product Overview
USG6600 Products Overview
Product Introduction
Hardware Architecture
Function and Feature
Application Scenario
FW20 USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Installation and Configuration of Firewall
Installation Hardware
Initial Connection Configuration Introduction
Basic Configuration Introduction
Device Upgrade Guide
Configuration WEB Guide
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 302
Deploy Configuration
Function and Configuration
FW21 USG6600 Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Service Feature and Configuration of USG6600 Firewall
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall NAT
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall L2TP
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall GRE
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall IPSec
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall SSL
UTM Features
Introduction to UTM feature
Networking and Configuration
Maintenance and Troubleshooting of USG6600 Firewall
Routine Maintenance
Fault Analysis and solve Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 303
3.15.5 USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's high-end series firewall
Describe the software function of Huawei's high-end series firewall
Describe the performance parameter of Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Master USG9500 Hardware Installation
Master USG9500 Basic Configuration
Content
FW14 USG9500 Series Product Overview
USG9500 Product Overview
Network Orientation of Firewall
Hardware Structure of Firewall
Function Characteristics of Firewall
Typical Application of Firewall
FW15 USG9500 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Basic Configuration
Hardware Installation
Initial Connection Configuration
Introduction of Basic Configuration in Command Line Interface
Update Guide
Web GUI Configuration Guide
USG9500 Series Firewall Product Overview
FW14 0.5d Lecture,
USG9500 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration
FW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 304
Quick Start Configuration
Basic Firewall feature introduction and feature configuration
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 305
3.15.6 USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include
USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.
Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.
Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.
Understand the application of NAT
Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls
Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's high-end series firewall
Describe the software function of Huawei's high-end series firewall
USG9500 Series Firewall Product Overview
FW14 0.5d Lecture,
USG9500 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration
FW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Firewall Elementary Technology
Basic Firewall Technology
Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d
USG9500 Series Firewall Operation and Maintenance
FW16 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 306
Describe the performance parameter of Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Master USG9500 Hardware Installation
Master USG9500 Basic Configuration
Master USG9500 Basic Function Features and Configurations
Master USG9500 Routine Maintenance
Master Basic Principles of USG9500 Maintenance
Master USG9500 Information Collection
Master USG9500 Troubleshooting Ability
Content
FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall Working Modes
Firewall Security Zones
Firewall Functions
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Packet Filtering Technology
ACL Overview
Interface-based Packet Filtering
Interzone Packet Filtering
Application Analysis of Packet Filtering
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
FW14 USG9500 Series Product Overview
USG9500 Product Overview
Network Orientation of Firewall
Hardware Structure of Firewall
Function Characteristics of Firewall
Typical Application of Firewall
FW15 USG9500 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Basic Configuration
Hardware Installation
Initial Connection Configuration
Introduction of Basic Configuration in Command Line Interface
Update Guide
Web GUI Configuration Guide
Quick Start Configuration
FW16 USG9500 Series Product Operation and Maintenance
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 307
Function Features and Configurations
NAT Features and Configurations
L2TP Feature and Configuration
GRE Feature and Configuration
IPSec Feature and Configuration
IPS Feature and Configuration
DPI Feature and Configuration
Dual System and Configuration Operation Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Routine Maintenance
Information Collection Introduction
Basic Maintenance Task
Troubleshooting
Basic Firewall feature introduction and feature configuration
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 308
3.15.7 USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
Training(Fast-Track)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall
Understand firewall security zone
Understand ASPF technology
Master firewall Security Policy and configuration
Understand Packet Filtering technology
Understand NAT technology
Master the application scenarios configuration of NAT
Understand IP-link、Link-group、IP-CAR technology
Master IP-CAR configuration
Understand the principles of the IPSec VPN technology.
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.
Master VPN basic configuration
Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic technology and configuration
Master principles and configuration of the IPSec Dual-System Hot Backup
Understan firewall UTM technology
Understand firewall UTM basic configuration
Understand Application and configuration of basic attack defense technologies.
Firewall Series Product Overview
FW17 1d Lecture,
Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
FW18 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 309
Content
FW17 Firewall Series Product Overview
USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview
Product Introduction
Hardware Architecture
Function and Feature
Application Scenario
Basic Firewall Technology
Firewall Overview
Firewall Working Modes
Firewall Security Zones
Firewall Functions
Security Policy and configuration
Basic Firewall Configuration
Firewall Packet Filtering Technology
ACL Overview
Interface-based Packet Filtering
Interzone Packet Filtering
Application Analysis of Packet Filtering
Network Address Translation Technology
Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology
NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address
NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address
Bidirectional NAT Technology
NAT Application Scenario and Configuration
Firewall advanced features
IP-link technology
Link-group technology
Firewall IP-CAR technology
Firewall IP-CAR configuration
FW18 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance
IPSec VPN
IPSec VPN Overview
IPSec VPN Architecture
IPSec VPN Application Scenarios
IPSec VPN basic networking and configuration
SSL VPN
SSL VPN Overview
SSL VPN basic technology
SSL VPN Application Scenarios
SSL VPN basic networking and configuration
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 310
firewall Dual-System Hot Backup technologies.
VRRP principle
VGMP principle
HRP principle
firewall Dual-System Hot Backup networking
route mode+switch networking
route mode+router networking
route mode+router/switch networking
IPSec Dual-System Hot Backup configuration
Firewall UTM basic Technology
Background of UTM
Firewall UTM basis Technology
Firewall UTM Technology Application
Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall
Overview of Network Attacks
Attack Defense Technologie of flood
Attack Defense Technologie of scanning and sniffing
Attack Defense Technologie of Malformed packet
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 311
3.15.8 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the main hardware component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the software architecture of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application environment of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the hardware installation of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the physical environment requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the basics configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Content
FW31 SVN Product Overview
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview
Hardware Architecture
Hardware Specifications
Main Hardware Components
SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview
Products Function Introduction
SVN Product Overview
FW31 0.5d Lecture,
SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 312
Products Comparison
Products Positioning
FW32 SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Hardware Installation
Checking before Unpacking
Unpacking
Acceptance After Unpacking
Mounting the Device into the Cabinet
Physical Environment Requirement
Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device
Basics Configuration
Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device
Login SVN
Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device
Basics Configuration of SVN Device
Software Upgrade of SVN Device
Import License of SVN Device
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 313
3.15.9 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and
Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology
Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN
Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the main hardware component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the software architecture of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application environment of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the hardware installation of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the physical environment requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the basics configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the Solution deployment SVN2000/SVN500 Device
SVN Product Overview
FW31 0.5d Lecture,
SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
SVN Product Operation and Maintenance
FW33 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
SSL VPN Technology
FW05 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 314
Describe the high-level function configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the System Status of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login Manage page
Understand the Common faults and positioning method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the troubleshooting method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Content
FW05 SSL VPN Technology
SSL VPN
SSL VPN Overview
SSL VPN Technology
SSL VPN Security Policy
SSL VPN Application Scenario
FW31 SVN Product Overview
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview
Hardware Architecture
Hardware Specifications
Main Hardware Components
SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview
Products Function Introduction
Products Comparison
Products Positioning
FW32 SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Hardware Installation
Checking before Unpacking
Unpacking
Acceptance After Unpacking
Mounting the Device into the Cabinet
Physical Environment Requirement
Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device
Basics Configuration
Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device
Login SVN
Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device
Basics Configuration of SVN Device
Software Upgrade of SVN Device
Import License of SVN Device
FW33 SVN Product Operation and Maintenance
Service Deployment and Configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
SVN Deployment
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 315
Web Proxy Configuration
Network Extension Configuration
Port Forwarding Configuration
Multimedia tunnel Configuration
Smart Mobile Phone Access Configuration
File Sharing Configuration
Terminal Security Configuration
Role Function Configuration
Authentication and Authorization Configuration
Customized Page Configuration
Dual-System Hot Backup Configuration
Application Scenarios
Operation and Maintenance of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Basic Operation and Maintenance
High-level Operation and Maintenance
SVN2000/SVN5000 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Ideas
Troubleshooting Method
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 316
3.15.10 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
Understand Function Feature of ASG
Know the Typical Application of ASG
Describe ASG login method
Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Describe ASG Installation Procedure
Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG Manager
Understand Overview of Updating the signature database on ASG
Understand ASG Online Updating for the signature database
Understand ASG Local Updating for the signature database
Content
FW41 ASG Product Overview
ASG Product Orientation
ASG Product Orientation
ASG Hardware Introduction
ASG Appearance
ASG Power Module
ASG Product Overview
FW41 0.5d Lecture,
ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 317
ASG Heat Dissipation System
ASG Interface Cards
ASG Software Function
Traditional firewall Feature
UTM Feature
User Management
Policy Management
Device Management
Other Feature
ASG Typical Application Network
Large-Sized Enterprises Scenario
Small to Medium-sized Enterprises Scenario
FW42 ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration
ASG Basic Configuration
Login ASG
Configuration ASG Initialization Wizard
ASG Basic Configuration
ASG Software Upgrade
ASG MANAGER System Installation
Installation procedure
Installation in Centralized Deployment
Installation in Distributed Deployment
ASG Manager Updating the signature database
Database Updating Overview
Online Update
Local Update
Example for the signature database update
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 318
3.15.11 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and
Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG
Understand Function Feature of ASG
Know the Typical Application of ASG
Describe ASG login method
Describe ASG Initialization configuration
Describe ASG Installation Procedure
Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG Manager
Understand Overview of Updating the signature database on ASG
Understand ASG Online Updating for the signature database
Understand ASG Local Updating for the signature database
Describe the ASG product feature Introduction and Implementation of ASG
Describe the management module function of ASG
Understand ASG Manager Function Configuration
Describe the Alarm Management function of ASG Manager
ASG Product Overview
FW41 0.5d Lecture,
ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration
FW42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
ASG Product Operation and Maintenance
FW43 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 319
Describe the configuration of Alarm Management function in ASG Manager
Describe ASG Maintenance tool
Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance
Describe ASG Software Maintenance
Describe ASG Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager Routine Maintenance and Main method
Understand ASG Manager Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager fault finding in routine maintenance
Understand the basic troubleshooting knowledge
Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting method
Content
FW41 ASG Product Overview
ASG Product Orientation
ASG Product Orientation
ASG Hardware Introduction
ASG Appearance
ASG Power Module
ASG Heat Dissipation System
ASG Interface Cards
ASG Software Function
Traditional firewall Feature
UTM Feature
User Management
Policy Management
Device Management
Other Feature
ASG Typical Application Network
Large-Sized Enterprises Scenario
Small to Medium-sized Enterprises Scenario
FW42 ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration
ASG Basic Configuration
Login ASG
Configuration ASG Initialization Wizard
ASG Basic Configuration
ASG Software Upgrade
ASG MANAGER System Installation
Installation procedure
Installation in Centralized Deployment
Installation in Distributed Deployment
ASG Manager Updating the signature database
Database Updating Overview
Online Update
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 320
Local Update
Example for the signature database update
FW43 ASG Product Operation and Maintenance
ASG Feature Configuration
ASG Panel
ASG Software Architecture and Explanation
ASG Basic Function Configuration
ASG Manager Products Basic Configuration
Device Management
Synchronizing Configuration
Collector Management
ASG Manager Alarm management
Alarm Management Overview
Alarm Management Function
Alarm Management Configuration
Alarm Handling
Search, Confirm and Refresh Alarm
ASG Routine Maintenance
Maintenance Tool
Device Maintenance
Software Maintenance
Version Upgrade
ASG Manager Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
Version Upgrade
Troubleshooting
ASG Manager Troubleshooting
Fundamentals of Troubleshooting
ASG Manager Fundamentals of Troubleshooting
ASG Manager Fault Diagnosis Method
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 321
3.16 Security Management Software Training Programs
3.16.1 Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with OS.
Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the background of Policy Center system
Describe Policy Center system function and system structure.
Describe the function of each component.
Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application
Describe Policy Center System Performance index
Understand Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations
Be familiar with Policy Center Installation Process
Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic Operation
Content
SS11 Policy Center Product Overview
Overview of the Policy Center
Background of Policy Center
Policy Center Product Overview
Policy Center Product Features
Policy Center System Components
Terminal Management Center (TMC)
Policy Center Product Overview
SS11 0.5d Lecture,
Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration
SS12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 322
Policy Center Manager
Policy Center Controller
Scanner
Security access control gateway
The 802.1x switch
Policy Center Agent
Policy Center Configuration Requirements
Server Configuration Requirements
Configuration Requirements for the Client
Introduce Functions of the Policy Center
Security Management of Terminal Hosts
Behavior Management of Terminal Users
Security Access Control
Mobile Storage Device Management
Software Distribution
Patch Management
Asset Management
Policy Center Networking Applications
Centralized Networking
Distributed Networking
Hierarchical Networking
Policy Center performance specifications
SS12 Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations
Introduce Installation Process
Installing the Policy Center
Installing the Policy Center M Manager
Installing the Policy Center Controller
Installing a Scanner
Installing a User-defined Policy Editor
Installing the Policy Center Server Monitor
Initializing the Policy Center
Starting and Stopping the Policy Center
Removing the Policy Center
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 323
3.16.2 Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include Policy
Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with OS.
Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the background of terminal security.
Understand Policy Center System Architecture
Understand Policy Center System Functions
Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application
Describe the background of Policy Center system
Describe Policy Center system function and system structure.
Describe the function of each component.
Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application
Describe Policy Center System Performance index
Understand Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations
Policy Center Product Overview
SS11 0.5d Lecture,
Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration
SS12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Policy Center Product Operation and Maintenance
SS13 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
Basic Terminal Security Technology
SS01 1d Lecture,
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 324
Be familiar with Policy Center Installation Process
Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic Operation
Understand Functional modules of Policy Center
Understand Policy Center System Technology and Application
Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of Policy Center
Content
SS01 Basic Terminal Security Technology
Terminal Security Overview
Security Threats Faced by Intranets.
Challenges to Terminal Security Solutions.
Policy Center System Application
Introduce Policy Center System
Multidimensional Defense System for Terminal Security.
Deployment of the Policy Center System
Deployment of Terminal Security Policies
SS11 Policy Center Product Overview
Overview of the Policy Center
Background of Policy Center
Policy Center Product Overview
Policy Center Product Features
Policy Center System Components
Terminal Management Center (TMC)
Policy Center Manager
Policy Center Controller
Scanner
Security access control gateway
The 802.1x switch
Policy Center Agent
Policy Center Configuration Requirements
Server Configuration Requirements
Configuration Requirements for the Client
Introduce Functions of the Policy Center
Security Management of Terminal Hosts
Behavior Management of Terminal Users
Security Access Control
Mobile Storage Device Management
Software Distribution
Patch Management
Asset Management
Policy Center Networking Applications
Centralized Networking
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 325
Distributed Networking
Hierarchical Networking
Policy Center performance specifications
SS12 Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Policy Center M Installation Planning and Preparations
Introduce Installation Process
Installing the TMC
Installing the Policy Center Manager
Installing the Policy Center Controller
Installing a Scanner
Installing a User-defined Policy Editor
Installing the Policy Center Server Monitor
Initializing the Policy Center
Starting and Stopping the Policy Center
Removing the Policy Center
SS13 Policy Center Product Operation and Maintenance
Policy Center System Function Overview
Policy Center System Technology and Application
Technology and Application of Organization Management
Technology and Application of Inter-Terminal Access Control
Technology and Application of Security Policy Management
Technology and Application of Software distribution
Technology and Application of Patch Management
Technology and Application of Asset Management
Policy Center Routine maintenance
Policy Center System maintenance
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 326
3.16.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with OS.
Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with document security elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe the background of DSM system
Describe DSM system function and system structure.
Describe Typical Scenarios of DSM System Application
Describe DSM System Performance index
Understand DSM Installation Planning and Preparations
Be familiar with DSM Installation Process
Be familiar with DSM system Basic Operation
Understand Functional modules of DSM
Understand DSM System Technology and Application
Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of DSM
Content
SS21 DSM Product Overview
Overview of the DSM
DSM Product Overview
SS21 0.5d Lecture,
DSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration
SS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
DSM Product Operation and Maintenance
SS23 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 327
Current security status and security threats of enterprise documents
Describe Importance of the DSM.
DSM System Components
DSM Functions and Features
User and Department Management
Document Permission Management
Group Policies and Permission Templates
Cross system authorization
Log management
Documents type and editor
DSM Deployment
DSM Centralized Deployment
DSM Distributed Deployment
DSM Performance Specifications
Server Performance Specifications
Client Performance Specifications
SS22 DSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration
DSM Installation Planning
Planning Departments and Accounts
License Planning
Disk Partition Scheme
Description of Open Ports
Safety Precautions
Installation Preparations
Installing Microsoft Windows Server
Installing the Microsoft SQL Server
Changing the Setting of the Data Protection Function
Obtaining an ESN
DSM Installation
Installing the DSM Management Center
Installing the DSM Server
Configuring the Database Backup Tool
Installing the DSM Client
DSM Basic Operation
Starting and Stopping the DSM
Configuring the DSM
Uninstalling the DSM
Maintaining the Microsoft SQL Server
SS23 DSM Product Operation and Maintenance
DSM Management Center System Administrator Operation
Configuring the DSM Management Center
License Management
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 328
Managing the Weight of the DSM Management Center
Management Node Management
Department Management
Managing Group Policies
System Alarm Management
DSM Server System Administrator Operation
Planning Departments and Accounts
Department Management
Managing Document Administrators
Managing Group Policies
System Information Management
Managing the Weight of the DSM Server
Customizing Copyright Information
Configuring the Email Server
DSM Server Department Log Administrator Operation
Department Management
Managing Document Permissions
Department Log Management
Department Log Administrator Management
DSM Client Operation
Basic Concepts
Login
Security Document Management
Upgrading the DSM Client
Common DSM trouble shooting method
System warning inquired
Invalidity of Offline Permissions
Database break-down shifts
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 329
3.17 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs
3.17.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware architecture of NIP Device
Understand the hardware specifications of NIP Device
Understand the hardware main component of NIP Device
Understand the software architecture of NIP
Understand the software application scenario of NIP Device
Understand the hardware installation of NIP Device
Understand the physical environment of NIP Device
Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
Content
NI11 NIP Product Overview
NIP Introduction
NIP Introduction
IPS/IDS Hardware Overview
IPS/IDS Software Overview
NIP Product Overview
NI11 0.5d Lecture,
NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration
NI12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 330
The NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction
NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Specifications Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Main Component Introduction
NIP Software Architecture and Function Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction
NIP Software Application Scenario Introduction
NI12 NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Hardware Installation Introduction of NIP Device
Hardware Installation Introduction NIP Device
Physical Environment Requirement of NIP Device
Physical Environment Requirement NIP Device
NIP Configuration
Basic Console Networking Configuration
NIP Configuration
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 331
3.17.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and
Commissioning Training)
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware architecture of NIP Device
Understand the hardware specifications of NIP Device
Understand the hardware main component of NIP Device
Understand the software architecture of NIP
Understand the software application scenario of NIP Device
Understand the hardware installation of NIP Device
Understand the physical environment of NIP Device
Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device
Grasp Application control of IPS Device
Grasp Application control of IDS Device
Grasp Threat Prevention of IPS Device
Grasp Threat Prevention of IDS Device
Grasp Typical Application scene of IPS Device
NIP Product Overview
NI11 0.5d Lecture,
NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration
NI12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
NIP Product Operation and Maintenance
NI13 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 332
Grasp Typical Application scene of IDS Device
Grasp the maintenance operations of NIP Device
Grasp the software patches of NIP Device
Grasp the Troubleshooting of NIP Device
Content
NI11 NIP Product Overview
NIP Introduction
NIP Introduction
IPS/IDS Hardware Overview
IPS/IDS Software Overview
The NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction
NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Specifications Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Main Component Introduction
NIP Software Architecture and Function Introduction
NIP Software Architecture Introduction
NIP Software Application Scenario Introduction
NI12 NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration
Hardware Installation Introduction of NIP Device
Hardware Installation Introduction NIP Device
Physical Environment Requirement of NIP Device
Physical Environment Requirement NIP Device
NIP Configuration
Basic Console Networking Configuration
NIP Configuration
NI13 NIP Product Operation and Maintenance
NIP2000、5000 Application Security
Application Security Overview
Composition of Application Security Policies
Application Security (IDS Device)
Application Security (IPS Device)
NIP2000、5000 Traffic Security
Traffic Security Overview
Common DDoS attacks
Traffic Security (IPS Device)
Traffic Security (IDS Device)
NIP2000、5000 typical Application scene
Typical Application scene of IPS Device
Typical Application scene of IDS Device
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Maintenance operations of NIP Device
Software patches of NIP Device
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 333
Troubleshooting of NIP Device
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 334
3.18 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs
3.18.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei DDos Product Component
Describe DDos Network Orientation and Typical Application
Describe Principle of DDoS attack and DDoS defense technology
Understand network Design of management Center
Understand network Design of Detecting Center
Understand network Design of Cleaning Center
Understand mirroring traffic, monitor network traffic and redirection traffic in DDoS Solution
Master basic configuration and system management
Master DDoS Product Management and Customer Management
Master DDoS Solution Report management and System maintenance
Content
SU11 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance
Principle of DDOS Technology
Overview Of DDoS Attack
The Process of DDOS Defense
DDOS Defense technology
Anti-DDOS Solution Introduction
What is DDOS
Anti-DDOS Defense System Component
Anti-DDOS Function Introduction DDOS Defense Technology
Common ATIC system Networking Introduction
Mirroring traffic Solution and Redirection Traffic Solution
USG9300 Anti-DDOS Solution
DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
SU11 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 335
Huawei’s abnormal traffic monitor Solution
Anti-DDoS USG9300 Product Overview
Check and Clearing Traffic Technology
Management center
ADG5300 Anti-DDoS Solution
Security Zone and ACL
Blacklist
Port mapping and ASPF
Implementation of management center
Installation of management center
DDOS management center configuration Guide
Anti-DDoS Solution networking
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 336
3.18.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe iSOC Orientation and product value
Master iSOC System architecture and system component
Master iSOC main function feature
Know the iSOC Application Network
Know the iSOC installation process
Master iSOC initial deployment
Master iSOC basic Function configuration
Know the Routine Maintenance task
Master quick solve issue in iSoc system fault
Know the information collection in basic fault
Master Troubleshooting Process
Know Common fault in iSoc
Content
SU31 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance
iSOC Solution Overview
Solution overview
System Component
Function Feature
iSOC Installation and Configuration
Hardware Installation
Initiation
Basic Function Configuration
iSOC Operation Maintenance
Routine Maintenance Process
System Maintenance
iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
SU31 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 337
Hardware Maintenance
Backup and Restore Policy
iSOC Troubleshooting
Basic fundamental of Troubleshooting
The Common fault
Module replacement
Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 338
3.18.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Describe UMA orientation and product value
Master UMA system architecture and system component
Master UMA main function feature
Know the UMA application network
Master UMA initial configuration
Master UMA basic function configuration
Know Common fault finding in UMA
Content
SU41 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance
Background of IT Operation maintenance audit
IT Operation maintenance audit
Definition
Basic System architecture
Basic Management Process
UMA Solution Overview
UMA Solution Overview
Solution Value
Implementation UMA
System common management
System User management
User Authentication management
Host Asset management
Audit Management
UMA Troubleshooting
System Configuration FAQ
UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
SU41 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 339
Assistance Process and Standard
Fault finding
Emergency Maintenance
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 340
3.18.4 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology
Understand the configuration of SSL VPN
Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of Anyoffice Device
Understand the main hardware component of Anyoffice Device
Understand the software architecture of Anyoffice Device
Understand the application environment of Anyoffice Device
Understand the application scenario of Anyoffice Device
Describe the basics configuration of Anyoffice Device
Understand the Solution deployment Anyoffice Device
Describe the high-level function configuration of Anyoffice Device
Describe the Anyoffice Deployment and Mobile Configuration of Anyoffice Device
Understand the Common faults and positioning method of Anyoffice Device
Understand the troubleshooting method of Anyoffice Device
Content
SU42 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance
SSL VPN
SSL VPN Overview
SSL VPN Technology
SSL VPN Security Policy
SSL VPN Application Scenario
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Products Overview
SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview
Hardware Architecture
Hardware Specifications
Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training
SU42 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 341
Main Hardware Components
SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview
Products Function Introduction
Products Comparison
Products Positioning
Hardware Installation
Checking before Unpacking
Unpacking
Acceptance After Unpacking
Mounting the Device into the Cabinet
Physical Environment Requirement
Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device
SVN Basics Configuration
Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device
Login SVN
Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device
Basics Configuration of SVN Device
Software Upgrade of SVN Device
Import License of SVN Device
MDM Basics Configuration
Device Indicator Introduction of MDM Device
Login MDM
Startup Wizard Configurations of MDM Device
Basics Configuration of MDM Device
Software Upgrade of MDM Device
Import License of MDM Device
Anyoffice Deployment and Mobile Configuration of Anyoffice Device
Security Broswer
Security Mail Policy
Anyoffice Deployment and Configuration of Anyoffice Device
Application Procedure
Application Scenarios
Service Deployment and Configuration
Operation and Maintenance of Anyoffice Device
Basic Operation and Maintenance
High-level Operation and Maintenance
Anyoffice Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Method
Duration
2 working days
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 342
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 343
3.19 Security Planning and Design Training Programs
3.19.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training
Training Path
Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:
Understand Huawei Security Concept
Understand Huawei Security Competence Center
Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security Products Application and Solution
Content
FW04 Firewall Planning and Design
Introduce Huawei Security Concept
Introduce Huawei Security Competence Center
Introduce Huawei Security Products
Firewall/UTM Products
SRG Products
SVN Products
NIP Products
Security Management Software
Application Scenarios and Solution Design
The Typical Scenarios of Firewall Application Design
DDOS Solution Design
Data Center Security Solution Design
Integration Intranet Security Solution Design
VPN Solution Design
Duration
1 working days
Firewall Planning and Design
FW04 1d Lecture,
COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 344
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12